perlapi - autogenerated documentation for the perl public API
This file contains the documentation of the perl public API generated by embed.pl, specifically a listing of functions, macros, flags, and variables that may be used by extension writers. At the end is a list of functions which have yet to be documented. The interfaces of those are subject to change without notice. Anything not listed here is not part of the public API, and should not be used by extension writers at all. For these reasons, blindly using functions listed in proto.h is to be avoided when writing extensions.
In Perl, unlike C, a string of characters may generally contain embedded
NUL
characters. Sometimes in the documentation a Perl string is referred
to as a "buffer" to distinguish it from a C string, but sometimes they are
both just referred to as strings.
Note that all Perl API global variables must be referenced with the PL_
prefix. Again, those not listed here are not to be used by extension writers,
and can be changed or removed without notice; same with macros.
Some macros are provided for compatibility with the older,
unadorned names, but this support may be disabled in a future release.
Perl was originally written to handle US-ASCII only (that is characters whose ordinal numbers are in the range 0 - 127). And documentation and comments may still use the term ASCII, when sometimes in fact the entire range from 0 - 255 is meant.
The non-ASCII characters below 256 can have various meanings, depending on various things. (See, most notably, perllocale.) But usually the whole range can be referred to as ISO-8859-1. Often, the term "Latin-1" (or "Latin1") is used as an equivalent for ISO-8859-1. But some people treat "Latin1" as referring just to the characters in the range 128 through 255, or somethimes from 160 through 255. This documentation uses "Latin1" and "Latin-1" to refer to all 256 characters.
Note that Perl can be compiled and run under either ASCII or EBCDIC (See
perlebcdic). Most of the documentation (and even comments in the code)
ignore the EBCDIC possibility.
For almost all purposes the differences are transparent.
As an example, under EBCDIC,
instead of UTF-8, UTF-EBCDIC is used to encode Unicode strings, and so
whenever this documentation refers to utf8
(and variants of that name, including in function names),
it also (essentially transparently) means UTF-EBCDIC
.
But the ordinals of characters differ between ASCII, EBCDIC, and
the UTF- encodings, and a string encoded in UTF-EBCDIC may occupy a different
number of bytes than in UTF-8.
The listing below is alphabetical, case insensitive.
Frees the all the elements of an array, leaving it empty.
The XS equivalent of @array = ()
. See also av_undef.
Note that it is possible that the actions of a destructor called directly or indirectly by freeing an element of the array could cause the reference count of the array itself to be reduced (e.g. by deleting an entry in the symbol table). So it is a possibility that the AV could have been freed (or even reallocated) on return from the call unless you hold a reference to it.
- void av_clear(AV *av)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Push an SV onto the end of the array, creating the array if necessary. A small internal helper function to remove a commonly duplicated idiom.
- void av_create_and_push(AV **const avp,
- SV *const val)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Unshifts an SV onto the beginning of the array, creating the array if necessary. A small internal helper function to remove a commonly duplicated idiom.
- SV** av_create_and_unshift_one(AV **const avp,
- SV *const val)
Deletes the element indexed by key
from the array, makes the element
mortal, and returns it. If flags
equals G_DISCARD
, the element is
freed and NULL is returned. NULL is also returned if key
is out of
range.
Perl equivalent: splice(@myarray, $key, 1, undef)
(with the
splice in void context if G_DISCARD
is present).
- SV* av_delete(AV *av, SSize_t key, I32 flags)
Returns true if the element indexed by key
has been initialized.
This relies on the fact that uninitialized array elements are set to
NULL
.
Perl equivalent: exists($myarray[$key]).
- bool av_exists(AV *av, SSize_t key)
Pre-extend an array. The key
is the index to which the array should be
extended.
- void av_extend(AV *av, SSize_t key)
Returns the SV at the specified index in the array. The key
is the
index. If lval is true, you are guaranteed to get a real SV back (in case
it wasn't real before), which you can then modify. Check that the return
value is non-null before dereferencing it to a SV*
.
See Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays in perlguts for more information on how to use this function on tied arrays.
The rough perl equivalent is $myarray[$key]
.
- SV** av_fetch(AV *av, SSize_t key, I32 lval)
Same as av_top_index()
. Deprecated, use av_top_index()
instead.
- int AvFILL(AV* av)
Set the highest index in the array to the given number, equivalent to
Perl's $#array = $fill;
.
The number of elements in the array will be fill + 1
after
av_fill()
returns. If the array was previously shorter, then the
additional elements appended are set to NULL. If the array
was longer, then the excess elements are freed. av_fill(av, -1)
is
the same as av_clear(av)
.
- void av_fill(AV *av, SSize_t fill)
Same as av_top_index. Note that, unlike what the name implies, it returns
the highest index in the array, so to get the size of the array you need to use
av_len(av) + 1
. This is unlike sv_len, which returns what you would
expect.
- SSize_t av_len(AV *av)
Creates a new AV and populates it with a list of SVs. The SVs are copied
into the array, so they may be freed after the call to av_make
. The new AV
will have a reference count of 1.
Perl equivalent: my @new_array = ($scalar1, $scalar2, $scalar3...);
- AV* av_make(SSize_t size, SV **strp)
Removes one SV from the end of the array, reducing its size by one and
returning the SV (transferring control of one reference count) to the
caller. Returns &PL_sv_undef
if the array is empty.
Perl equivalent: pop(@myarray);
- SV* av_pop(AV *av)
Pushes an SV (transferring control of one reference count) onto the end of the array. The array will grow automatically to accommodate the addition.
Perl equivalent: push @myarray, $val;
.
- void av_push(AV *av, SV *val)
Removes one SV from the start of the array, reducing its size by one and
returning the SV (transferring control of one reference count) to the
caller. Returns &PL_sv_undef
if the array is empty.
Perl equivalent: shift(@myarray);
- SV* av_shift(AV *av)
Stores an SV in an array. The array index is specified as key
. The
return value will be NULL
if the operation failed or if the value did not
need to be actually stored within the array (as in the case of tied
arrays). Otherwise, it can be dereferenced
to get the SV*
that was stored
there (= val
)).
Note that the caller is responsible for suitably incrementing the reference
count of val
before the call, and decrementing it if the function
returned NULL
.
Approximate Perl equivalent: splice(@myarray, $key, 1, $val)
.
See Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays in perlguts for more information on how to use this function on tied arrays.
- SV** av_store(AV *av, SSize_t key, SV *val)
Same as av_top_index()
.
- int av_tindex(AV* av)
Returns the highest index in the array. The number of elements in the
array is av_top_index(av) + 1
. Returns -1 if the array is empty.
The Perl equivalent for this is $#myarray
.
(A slightly shorter form is av_tindex
.)
- SSize_t av_top_index(AV *av)
Undefines the array. The XS equivalent of undef(@array).
As well as freeing all the elements of the array (like av_clear()
), this
also frees the memory used by the av to store its list of scalars.
See av_clear for a note about the array possibly being invalid on return.
- void av_undef(AV *av)
Unshift the given number of undef values onto the beginning of the
array. The array will grow automatically to accommodate the addition.
Perl equivalent: unshift @myarray, ((undef) x $num);
- void av_unshift(AV *av, SSize_t num)
Returns the AV of the specified Perl global or package array with the given
name (so it won't work on lexical variables). flags
are passed
to gv_fetchpv
. If GV_ADD
is set and the
Perl variable does not exist then it will be created. If flags
is zero
and the variable does not exist then NULL is returned.
Perl equivalent: @{"$name"}
.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- AV* get_av(const char *name, I32 flags)
Creates a new AV. The reference count is set to 1.
Perl equivalent: my @array;
.
- AV* newAV()
In-place sort an array of SV pointers with the given comparison routine.
Currently this always uses mergesort. See sortsv_flags for a more
flexible routine.
- void sortsv(SV** array, size_t num_elts,
- SVCOMPARE_t cmp)
In-place sort an array of SV pointers with the given comparison routine, with various SORTf_* flag options.
- void sortsv_flags(SV** array, size_t num_elts,
- SVCOMPARE_t cmp, U32 flags)
Performs a callback to the specified named and package-scoped Perl subroutine
with argv
(a NULL
-terminated array of strings) as arguments. See
perlcall.
Approximate Perl equivalent: &{"$sub_name"}(@$argv)
.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- I32 call_argv(const char* sub_name, I32 flags,
- char** argv)
Performs a callback to the specified Perl method. The blessed object must be on the stack. See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- I32 call_method(const char* methname, I32 flags)
Performs a callback to the specified Perl sub. See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- I32 call_pv(const char* sub_name, I32 flags)
Performs a callback to the Perl sub specified by the SV.
If neither the G_METHOD
nor G_METHOD_NAMED
flag is supplied, the
SV may be any of a CV, a GV, a reference to a CV, a reference to a GV
or SvPV(sv)
will be used as the name of the sub to call.
If the G_METHOD
flag is supplied, the SV may be a reference to a CV or
SvPV(sv)
will be used as the name of the method to call.
If the G_METHOD_NAMED
flag is supplied, SvPV(sv)
will be used as
the name of the method to call.
Some other values are treated specially for internal use and should not be depended on.
See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- I32 call_sv(SV* sv, VOL I32 flags)
Opening bracket on a callback. See LEAVE and perlcall.
- ENTER;
Same as ENTER, but when debugging is enabled it also associates the
given literal string with the new scope.
- ENTER_with_name(name);
Tells Perl to eval the given string in scalar context and return an SV* result.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- SV* eval_pv(const char* p, I32 croak_on_error)
Tells Perl to eval the string in the SV. It supports the same flags
as call_sv
, with the obvious exception of G_EVAL
. See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- I32 eval_sv(SV* sv, I32 flags)
Closing bracket for temporaries on a callback. See SAVETMPS and
perlcall.
- FREETMPS;
Closing bracket on a callback. See ENTER and perlcall.
- LEAVE;
Same as LEAVE, but when debugging is enabled it first checks that the
scope has the given name. name
must be a NUL
-terminated literal string.
- LEAVE_with_name(name);
Opening bracket for temporaries on a callback. See FREETMPS and
perlcall.
- SAVETMPS;
Perl uses "full" Unicode case mappings. This means that converting a single
character to another case may result in a sequence of more than one character.
For example, the uppercase of ß
(LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S) is the two
character sequence SS
. This presents some complications The lowercase of
all characters in the range 0..255 is a single character, and thus
toLOWER_L1 is furnished. But, toUPPER_L1
can't exist, as it couldn't
return a valid result for all legal inputs. Instead toUPPER_uvchr has
an API that does allow every possible legal result to be returned.) Likewise
no other function that is crippled by not being able to give the correct
results for the full range of possible inputs has been implemented here.
Converts the specified character to foldcase. If the input is anything but an
ASCII uppercase character, that input character itself is returned. Variant
toFOLD_A
is equivalent. (There is no equivalent to_FOLD_L1
for the full
Latin1 range, as the full generality of toFOLD_uvchr is needed there.)
- U8 toFOLD(U8 ch)
This is like toFOLD_utf8_safe, but doesn't have the e
parameter The function therefore can't check if it is reading
beyond the end of the string. Starting in Perl v5.30, it will take the e
parameter, becoming a synonym for toFOLD_utf8_safe
. At that time every
program that uses it will have to be changed to successfully compile. In the
meantime, the first runtime call to toFOLD_utf8
from each call point in the
program will raise a deprecation warning, enabled by default. You can convert
your program now to use toFOLD_utf8_safe
, and avoid the warnings, and get an
extra measure of protection, or you can wait until v5.30, when you'll be forced
to add the e
parameter.
- UV toFOLD_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the first UTF-8 encoded character in the sequence starting at p
and
extending no further than e - 1
to its foldcase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the foldcase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the foldcased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
The suffix _safe
in the function's name indicates that it will not attempt
to read beyond e - 1
, provided that the constraint s < e
is
true (this is asserted for in -DDEBUGGING
builds). If the UTF-8 for the
input character is malformed in some way, the program may croak, or the
function may return the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, at the discretion of the
implementation, and subject to change in future releases.
- UV toFOLD_utf8_safe(U8* p, U8* e, U8* s,
- STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the code point cp
to its foldcase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. The code
point is interpreted as native if less than 256; otherwise as Unicode. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the foldcase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the foldcased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
- UV toFOLD_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the specified character to lowercase. If the input is anything but an
ASCII uppercase character, that input character itself is returned. Variant
toLOWER_A
is equivalent.
- U8 toLOWER(U8 ch)
Converts the specified Latin1 character to lowercase. The results are undefined if the input doesn't fit in a byte.
- U8 toLOWER_L1(U8 ch)
Converts the specified character to lowercase using the current locale's rules, if possible; otherwise returns the input character itself.
- U8 toLOWER_LC(U8 ch)
This is like toLOWER_utf8_safe, but doesn't have the e
parameter The function therefore can't check if it is reading
beyond the end of the string. Starting in Perl v5.30, it will take the e
parameter, becoming a synonym for toLOWER_utf8_safe
. At that time every
program that uses it will have to be changed to successfully compile. In the
meantime, the first runtime call to toLOWER_utf8
from each call point in the
program will raise a deprecation warning, enabled by default. You can convert
your program now to use toLOWER_utf8_safe
, and avoid the warnings, and get an
extra measure of protection, or you can wait until v5.30, when you'll be forced
to add the e
parameter.
- UV toLOWER_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the first UTF-8 encoded character in the sequence starting at p
and
extending no further than e - 1
to its lowercase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the lowercase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the lowercased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
The suffix _safe
in the function's name indicates that it will not attempt
to read beyond e - 1
, provided that the constraint s < e
is
true (this is asserted for in -DDEBUGGING
builds). If the UTF-8 for the
input character is malformed in some way, the program may croak, or the
function may return the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, at the discretion of the
implementation, and subject to change in future releases.
- UV toLOWER_utf8_safe(U8* p, U8* e, U8* s,
- STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the code point cp
to its lowercase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. The code
point is interpreted as native if less than 256; otherwise as Unicode. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the lowercase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the lowercased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
- UV toLOWER_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the specified character to titlecase. If the input is anything but an
ASCII lowercase character, that input character itself is returned. Variant
toTITLE_A
is equivalent. (There is no toTITLE_L1
for the full Latin1
range, as the full generality of toTITLE_uvchr is needed there. Titlecase is
not a concept used in locale handling, so there is no functionality for that.)
- U8 toTITLE(U8 ch)
This is like toLOWER_utf8_safe, but doesn't have the e
parameter The function therefore can't check if it is reading
beyond the end of the string. Starting in Perl v5.30, it will take the e
parameter, becoming a synonym for toTITLE_utf8_safe
. At that time every
program that uses it will have to be changed to successfully compile. In the
meantime, the first runtime call to toTITLE_utf8
from each call point in the
program will raise a deprecation warning, enabled by default. You can convert
your program now to use toTITLE_utf8_safe
, and avoid the warnings, and get an
extra measure of protection, or you can wait until v5.30, when you'll be forced
to add the e
parameter.
- UV toTITLE_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the first UTF-8 encoded character in the sequence starting at p
and
extending no further than e - 1
to its titlecase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the titlecase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the titlecased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
The suffix _safe
in the function's name indicates that it will not attempt
to read beyond e - 1
, provided that the constraint s < e
is
true (this is asserted for in -DDEBUGGING
builds). If the UTF-8 for the
input character is malformed in some way, the program may croak, or the
function may return the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, at the discretion of the
implementation, and subject to change in future releases.
- UV toTITLE_utf8_safe(U8* p, U8* e, U8* s,
- STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the code point cp
to its titlecase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. The code
point is interpreted as native if less than 256; otherwise as Unicode. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the titlecase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the titlecased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
- UV toTITLE_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the specified character to uppercase. If the input is anything but an
ASCII lowercase character, that input character itself is returned. Variant
toUPPER_A
is equivalent.
- U8 toUPPER(U8 ch)
This is like toUPPER_utf8_safe, but doesn't have the e
parameter The function therefore can't check if it is reading
beyond the end of the string. Starting in Perl v5.30, it will take the e
parameter, becoming a synonym for toUPPER_utf8_safe
. At that time every
program that uses it will have to be changed to successfully compile. In the
meantime, the first runtime call to toUPPER_utf8
from each call point in the
program will raise a deprecation warning, enabled by default. You can convert
your program now to use toUPPER_utf8_safe
, and avoid the warnings, and get an
extra measure of protection, or you can wait until v5.30, when you'll be forced
to add the e
parameter.
- UV toUPPER_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the first UTF-8 encoded character in the sequence starting at p
and
extending no further than e - 1
to its uppercase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the uppercase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the uppercased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more).
The suffix _safe
in the function's name indicates that it will not attempt
to read beyond e - 1
, provided that the constraint s < e
is
true (this is asserted for in -DDEBUGGING
builds). If the UTF-8 for the
input character is malformed in some way, the program may croak, or the
function may return the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, at the discretion of the
implementation, and subject to change in future releases.
- UV toUPPER_utf8_safe(U8* p, U8* e, U8* s,
- STRLEN* lenp)
Converts the code point cp
to its uppercase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in s, and its length in bytes in lenp
. The code
point is interpreted as native if less than 256; otherwise as Unicode. Note
that the buffer pointed to by s needs to be at least UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1
bytes since the uppercase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the uppercased version is returned (but note, as explained at the top of this section, that there may be more.)
- UV toUPPER_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
This section is about functions (really macros) that classify characters
into types, such as punctuation versus alphabetic, etc. Most of these are
analogous to regular expression character classes. (See
POSIX Character Classes in perlrecharclass.) There are several variants for
each class. (Not all macros have all variants; each item below lists the
ones valid for it.) None are affected by use bytes
, and only the ones
with LC
in the name are affected by the current locale.
The base function, e.g., isALPHA()
, takes an octet (either a char
or a
U8
) as input and returns a boolean as to whether or not the character
represented by that octet is (or on non-ASCII platforms, corresponds to) an
ASCII character in the named class based on platform, Unicode, and Perl rules.
If the input is a number that doesn't fit in an octet, FALSE is returned.
Variant isFOO_A (e.g., isALPHA_A()
) is identical to the base function
with no suffix "_A"
. This variant is used to emphasize by its name that
only ASCII-range characters can return TRUE.
Variant isFOO_L1 imposes the Latin-1 (or EBCDIC equivalent) character set
onto the platform. That is, the code points that are ASCII are unaffected,
since ASCII is a subset of Latin-1. But the non-ASCII code points are treated
as if they are Latin-1 characters. For example, isWORDCHAR_L1()
will return
true when called with the code point 0xDF, which is a word character in both
ASCII and EBCDIC (though it represents different characters in each).
Variant isFOO_uvchr is like the isFOO_L1 variant, but accepts any UV code
point as input. If the code point is larger than 255, Unicode rules are used
to determine if it is in the character class. For example,
isWORDCHAR_uvchr(0x100)
returns TRUE, since 0x100 is LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A
WITH MACRON in Unicode, and is a word character.
Variant isFOO_utf8_safe is like isFOO_uvchr, but is used for UTF-8
encoded strings. Each call classifies one character, even if the string
contains many. This variant takes two parameters. The first, p
, is a
pointer to the first byte of the character to be classified. (Recall that it
may take more than one byte to represent a character in UTF-8 strings.) The
second parameter, e
, points to anywhere in the string beyond the first
character, up to one byte past the end of the entire string. The suffix
_safe
in the function's name indicates that it will not attempt to read
beyond e - 1
, provided that the constraint s < e
is true (this
is asserted for in -DDEBUGGING
builds). If the UTF-8 for the input
character is malformed in some way, the program may croak, or the function may
return FALSE, at the discretion of the implementation, and subject to change in
future releases.
Variant isFOO_utf8 is like isFOO_utf8_safe, but takes just a single
parameter, p
, which has the same meaning as the corresponding parameter does
in isFOO_utf8_safe. The function therefore can't check if it is reading
beyond the end of the string. Starting in Perl v5.30, it will take a second
parameter, becoming a synonym for isFOO_utf8_safe. At that time every
program that uses it will have to be changed to successfully compile. In the
meantime, the first runtime call to isFOO_utf8 from each call point in the
program will raise a deprecation warning, enabled by default. You can convert
your program now to use isFOO_utf8_safe, and avoid the warnings, and get an
extra measure of protection, or you can wait until v5.30, when you'll be forced
to add the e
parameter.
Variant isFOO_LC is like the isFOO_A and isFOO_L1 variants, but the
result is based on the current locale, which is what LC
in the name stands
for. If Perl can determine that the current locale is a UTF-8 locale, it uses
the published Unicode rules; otherwise, it uses the C library function that
gives the named classification. For example, isDIGIT_LC()
when not in a
UTF-8 locale returns the result of calling isdigit()
. FALSE is always
returned if the input won't fit into an octet. On some platforms where the C
library function is known to be defective, Perl changes its result to follow
the POSIX standard's rules.
Variant isFOO_LC_uvchr is like isFOO_LC, but is defined on any UV. It
returns the same as isFOO_LC for input code points less than 256, and
returns the hard-coded, not-affected-by-locale, Unicode results for larger ones.
Variant isFOO_LC_utf8_safe is like isFOO_LC_uvchr, but is used for UTF-8
encoded strings. Each call classifies one character, even if the string
contains many. This variant takes two parameters. The first, p
, is a
pointer to the first byte of the character to be classified. (Recall that it
may take more than one byte to represent a character in UTF-8 strings.) The
second parameter, e
, points to anywhere in the string beyond the first
character, up to one byte past the end of the entire string. The suffix
_safe
in the function's name indicates that it will not attempt to read
beyond e - 1
, provided that the constraint s < e
is true (this
is asserted for in -DDEBUGGING
builds). If the UTF-8 for the input
character is malformed in some way, the program may croak, or the function may
return FALSE, at the discretion of the implementation, and subject to change in
future releases.
Variant isFOO_LC_utf8 is like isFOO_LC_utf8_safe, but takes just a single
parameter, p
, which has the same meaning as the corresponding parameter does
in isFOO_LC_utf8_safe. The function therefore can't check if it is reading
beyond the end of the string. Starting in Perl v5.30, it will take a second
parameter, becoming a synonym for isFOO_LC_utf8_safe. At that time every
program that uses it will have to be changed to successfully compile. In the
meantime, the first runtime call to isFOO_LC_utf8 from each call point in
the program will raise a deprecation warning, enabled by default. You can
convert your program now to use isFOO_LC_utf8_safe, and avoid the warnings,
and get an extra measure of protection, or you can wait until v5.30, when
you'll be forced to add the e
parameter.
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is an
alphabetic character, analogous to m/[[:alpha:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isALPHA_A
, isALPHA_L1
, isALPHA_uvchr
, isALPHA_utf8_safe
,
isALPHA_LC
, isALPHA_LC_uvchr
, and isALPHA_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isALPHA(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a either an
alphabetic character or decimal digit, analogous to m/[[:alnum:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isALPHANUMERIC_A
, isALPHANUMERIC_L1
, isALPHANUMERIC_uvchr
,
isALPHANUMERIC_utf8_safe
, isALPHANUMERIC_LC
, isALPHANUMERIC_LC_uvchr
,
and isALPHANUMERIC_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isALPHANUMERIC(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is one of the 128
characters in the ASCII character set, analogous to m/[[:ascii:]]/.
On non-ASCII platforms, it returns TRUE iff this
character corresponds to an ASCII character. Variants isASCII_A()
and
isASCII_L1()
are identical to isASCII()
.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isASCII_uvchr
, isASCII_utf8_safe
, isASCII_LC
, isASCII_LC_uvchr
, and
isASCII_LC_utf8_safe
. Note, however, that some platforms do not have the C
library routine isascii()
. In these cases, the variants whose names contain
LC
are the same as the corresponding ones without.
Also note, that because all ASCII characters are UTF-8 invariant (meaning they
have the exact same representation (always a single byte) whether encoded in
UTF-8 or not), isASCII
will give the correct results when called with any
byte in any string encoded or not in UTF-8. And similarly isASCII_utf8_safe
will work properly on any string encoded or not in UTF-8.
- bool isASCII(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
character considered to be a blank, analogous to m/[[:blank:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isBLANK_A
, isBLANK_L1
, isBLANK_uvchr
, isBLANK_utf8_safe
,
isBLANK_LC
, isBLANK_LC_uvchr
, and isBLANK_LC_utf8_safe
. Note,
however, that some platforms do not have the C library routine
isblank()
. In these cases, the variants whose names contain LC
are
the same as the corresponding ones without.
- bool isBLANK(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
control character, analogous to m/[[:cntrl:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isCNTRL_A
, isCNTRL_L1
, isCNTRL_uvchr
, isCNTRL_utf8_safe
,
isCNTRL_LC
, isCNTRL_LC_uvchr
, and isCNTRL_LC_utf8_safe
On EBCDIC
platforms, you almost always want to use the isCNTRL_L1
variant.
- bool isCNTRL(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
digit, analogous to m/[[:digit:]]/.
Variants isDIGIT_A
and isDIGIT_L1
are identical to isDIGIT
.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isDIGIT_uvchr
, isDIGIT_utf8_safe
, isDIGIT_LC
, isDIGIT_LC_uvchr
, and
isDIGIT_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isDIGIT(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
graphic character, analogous to m/[[:graph:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants isGRAPH_A
, isGRAPH_L1
, isGRAPH_uvchr
, isGRAPH_utf8_safe
,
isGRAPH_LC
, isGRAPH_LC_uvchr
, and isGRAPH_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isGRAPH(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character can be the
second or succeeding character of an identifier. This is very close to, but
not quite the same as the official Unicode property XID_Continue
. The
difference is that this returns true only if the input character also matches
isWORDCHAR. See the top of this section for
an
explanation of variants isIDCONT_A
, isIDCONT_L1
, isIDCONT_uvchr
,
isIDCONT_utf8_safe
, isIDCONT_LC
, isIDCONT_LC_uvchr
, and
isIDCONT_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isIDCONT(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character can be the first
character of an identifier. This is very close to, but not quite the same as
the official Unicode property XID_Start
. The difference is that this
returns true only if the input character also matches isWORDCHAR.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isIDFIRST_A
, isIDFIRST_L1
, isIDFIRST_uvchr
, isIDFIRST_utf8_safe
,
isIDFIRST_LC
, isIDFIRST_LC_uvchr
, and isIDFIRST_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isIDFIRST(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
lowercase character, analogous to m/[[:lower:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isLOWER_A
, isLOWER_L1
, isLOWER_uvchr
, isLOWER_utf8_safe
,
isLOWER_LC
, isLOWER_LC_uvchr
, and isLOWER_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isLOWER(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is an
octal digit, [0-7].
The only two variants are isOCTAL_A
and isOCTAL_L1
; each is identical to
isOCTAL
.
- bool isOCTAL(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
printable character, analogous to m/[[:print:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isPRINT_A
, isPRINT_L1
, isPRINT_uvchr
, isPRINT_utf8_safe
,
isPRINT_LC
, isPRINT_LC_uvchr
, and isPRINT_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isPRINT(char ch)
(short for Posix Space)
Starting in 5.18, this is identical in all its forms to the
corresponding isSPACE()
macros.
The locale forms of this macro are identical to their corresponding
isSPACE()
forms in all Perl releases. In releases prior to 5.18, the
non-locale forms differ from their isSPACE()
forms only in that the
isSPACE()
forms don't match a Vertical Tab, and the isPSXSPC()
forms do.
Otherwise they are identical. Thus this macro is analogous to what
m/[[:space:]]/ matches in a regular expression.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants isPSXSPC_A
, isPSXSPC_L1
, isPSXSPC_uvchr
, isPSXSPC_utf8_safe
,
isPSXSPC_LC
, isPSXSPC_LC_uvchr
, and isPSXSPC_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isPSXSPC(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
punctuation character, analogous to m/[[:punct:]]/.
Note that the definition of what is punctuation isn't as
straightforward as one might desire. See POSIX Character Classes in perlrecharclass for details.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants isPUNCT_A
, isPUNCT_L1
, isPUNCT_uvchr
, isPUNCT_utf8_safe
,
isPUNCT_LC
, isPUNCT_LC_uvchr
, and isPUNCT_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isPUNCT(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a
whitespace character. This is analogous
to what m/\s/ matches in a regular expression. Starting in Perl 5.18
this also matches what m/[[:space:]]/ does. Prior to 5.18, only the
locale forms of this macro (the ones with LC
in their names) matched
precisely what m/[[:space:]]/ does. In those releases, the only difference,
in the non-locale variants, was that isSPACE()
did not match a vertical tab.
(See isPSXSPC for a macro that matches a vertical tab in all releases.)
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isSPACE_A
, isSPACE_L1
, isSPACE_uvchr
, isSPACE_utf8_safe
,
isSPACE_LC
, isSPACE_LC_uvchr
, and isSPACE_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isSPACE(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is an
uppercase character, analogous to m/[[:upper:]]/.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants isUPPER_A
, isUPPER_L1
, isUPPER_uvchr
, isUPPER_utf8_safe
,
isUPPER_LC
, isUPPER_LC_uvchr
, and isUPPER_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isUPPER(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a character
that is a word character, analogous to what m/\w/ and m/[[:word:]]/ match
in a regular expression. A word character is an alphabetic character, a
decimal digit, a connecting punctuation character (such as an underscore), or
a "mark" character that attaches to one of those (like some sort of accent).
isALNUM()
is a synonym provided for backward compatibility, even though a
word character includes more than the standard C language meaning of
alphanumeric.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants isWORDCHAR_A
, isWORDCHAR_L1
, isWORDCHAR_uvchr
, and
isWORDCHAR_utf8_safe
. isWORDCHAR_LC
, isWORDCHAR_LC_uvchr
, and
isWORDCHAR_LC_utf8_safe
are also as described there, but additionally
include the platform's native underscore.
- bool isWORDCHAR(char ch)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a hexadecimal
digit. In the ASCII range these are [0-9A-Fa-f]
. Variants isXDIGIT_A()
and isXDIGIT_L1()
are identical to isXDIGIT()
.
See the top of this section for an explanation of
variants
isXDIGIT_uvchr
, isXDIGIT_utf8_safe
, isXDIGIT_LC
, isXDIGIT_LC_uvchr
,
and isXDIGIT_LC_utf8_safe
.
- bool isXDIGIT(char ch)
Create and return a new interpreter by cloning the current one.
perl_clone
takes these flags as parameters:
CLONEf_COPY_STACKS
- is used to, well, copy the stacks also,
without it we only clone the data and zero the stacks,
with it we copy the stacks and the new perl interpreter is
ready to run at the exact same point as the previous one.
The pseudo-fork code uses COPY_STACKS
while the
threads->create doesn't.
CLONEf_KEEP_PTR_TABLE
-
perl_clone
keeps a ptr_table with the pointer of the old
variable as a key and the new variable as a value,
this allows it to check if something has been cloned and not
clone it again but rather just use the value and increase the
refcount. If KEEP_PTR_TABLE
is not set then perl_clone
will kill
the ptr_table using the function
ptr_table_free(PL_ptr_table); PL_ptr_table = NULL;
,
reason to keep it around is if you want to dup some of your own
variable who are outside the graph perl scans, an example of this
code is in threads.xs create.
CLONEf_CLONE_HOST
-
This is a win32 thing, it is ignored on unix, it tells perls
win32host code (which is c++) to clone itself, this is needed on
win32 if you want to run two threads at the same time,
if you just want to do some stuff in a separate perl interpreter
and then throw it away and return to the original one,
you don't need to do anything.
- PerlInterpreter* perl_clone(
- PerlInterpreter *proto_perl,
- UV flags
- )
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Temporarily disable an entry in this BHK structure, by clearing the
appropriate flag. which
is a preprocessor token indicating which
entry to disable.
- void BhkDISABLE(BHK *hk, which)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Re-enable an entry in this BHK structure, by setting the appropriate
flag. which
is a preprocessor token indicating which entry to enable.
This will assert (under -DDEBUGGING) if the entry doesn't contain a valid
pointer.
- void BhkENABLE(BHK *hk, which)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Set an entry in the BHK structure, and set the flags to indicate it is
valid. which
is a preprocessing token indicating which entry to set.
The type of ptr
depends on the entry.
- void BhkENTRY_set(BHK *hk, which, void *ptr)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Register a set of hooks to be called when the Perl lexical scope changes at compile time. See Compile-time scope hooks in perlguts.
NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as Perl_blockhook_register with an aTHX_ parameter.
- void Perl_blockhook_register(pTHX_ BHK *hk)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Generates and returns a standard Perl hash representing the full set of
key/value pairs in the cop hints hash cophh
. flags
is currently
unused and must be zero.
- HV * cophh_2hv(const COPHH *cophh, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Make and return a complete copy of the cop hints hash cophh
.
- COPHH * cophh_copy(COPHH *cophh)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_delete_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- COPHH * cophh_delete_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *key, U32 hash,
- U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Delete a key and its associated value from the cop hints hash cophh
,
and returns the modified hash. The returned hash pointer is in general
not the same as the hash pointer that was passed in. The input hash is
consumed by the function, and the pointer to it must not be subsequently
used. Use cophh_copy if you need both hashes.
The key is specified by keypv
and keylen
. If flags
has the
COPHH_KEY_UTF8
bit set, the key octets are interpreted as UTF-8,
otherwise they are interpreted as Latin-1. hash
is a precomputed
hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been precomputed.
- COPHH * cophh_delete_pvn(COPHH *cophh,
- const char *keypv,
- STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
- U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_delete_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead
of a string/length pair, and no precomputed hash.
- COPHH * cophh_delete_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *key, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_delete_pvn, but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.
- COPHH * cophh_delete_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
- U32 hash, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_fetch_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- SV * cophh_fetch_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *key, U32 hash,
- U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Look up the entry in the cop hints hash cophh
with the key specified by
keypv
and keylen
. If flags
has the COPHH_KEY_UTF8
bit set,
the key octets are interpreted as UTF-8, otherwise they are interpreted
as Latin-1. hash
is a precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if
it has not been precomputed. Returns a mortal scalar copy of the value
associated with the key, or &PL_sv_placeholder
if there is no value
associated with the key.
- SV * cophh_fetch_pvn(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *keypv,
- STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
- U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_fetch_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead
of a string/length pair, and no precomputed hash.
- SV * cophh_fetch_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *key, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_fetch_pvn, but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.
- SV * cophh_fetch_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
- U32 hash, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Discard the cop hints hash cophh
, freeing all resources associated
with it.
- void cophh_free(COPHH *cophh)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Generate and return a fresh cop hints hash containing no entries.
- COPHH * cophh_new_empty()
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_store_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- COPHH * cophh_store_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *key, U32 hash,
- SV *value, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Stores a value, associated with a key, in the cop hints hash cophh
,
and returns the modified hash. The returned hash pointer is in general
not the same as the hash pointer that was passed in. The input hash is
consumed by the function, and the pointer to it must not be subsequently
used. Use cophh_copy if you need both hashes.
The key is specified by keypv
and keylen
. If flags
has the
COPHH_KEY_UTF8
bit set, the key octets are interpreted as UTF-8,
otherwise they are interpreted as Latin-1. hash
is a precomputed
hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been precomputed.
value
is the scalar value to store for this key. value
is copied
by this function, which thus does not take ownership of any reference
to it, and later changes to the scalar will not be reflected in the
value visible in the cop hints hash. Complex types of scalar will not
be stored with referential integrity, but will be coerced to strings.
- COPHH * cophh_store_pvn(COPHH *cophh, const char *keypv,
- STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
- SV *value, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_store_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead
of a string/length pair, and no precomputed hash.
- COPHH * cophh_store_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
- const char *key, SV *value,
- U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like cophh_store_pvn, but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.
- COPHH * cophh_store_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
- U32 hash, SV *value, U32 flags)
Generates and returns a standard Perl hash representing the full set of
hint entries in the cop cop
. flags
is currently unused and must
be zero.
- HV * cop_hints_2hv(const COP *cop, U32 flags)
Like cop_hints_fetch_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- SV * cop_hints_fetch_pv(const COP *cop,
- const char *key, U32 hash,
- U32 flags)
Look up the hint entry in the cop cop
with the key specified by
keypv
and keylen
. If flags
has the COPHH_KEY_UTF8
bit set,
the key octets are interpreted as UTF-8, otherwise they are interpreted
as Latin-1. hash
is a precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if
it has not been precomputed. Returns a mortal scalar copy of the value
associated with the key, or &PL_sv_placeholder
if there is no value
associated with the key.
- SV * cop_hints_fetch_pvn(const COP *cop,
- const char *keypv,
- STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
- U32 flags)
Like cop_hints_fetch_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair, and no precomputed hash.
- SV * cop_hints_fetch_pvs(const COP *cop,
- const char *key, U32 flags)
Like cop_hints_fetch_pvn, but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.
- SV * cop_hints_fetch_sv(const COP *cop, SV *key,
- U32 hash, U32 flags)
Register a custom op. See Custom Operators in perlguts.
NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as Perl_custom_op_register with an aTHX_ parameter.
- void Perl_custom_op_register(pTHX_
- Perl_ppaddr_t ppaddr,
- const XOP *xop)
Return the XOP structure for a given custom op. This macro should be
considered internal to OP_NAME
and the other access macros: use them instead.
This macro does call a function. Prior
to 5.19.6, this was implemented as a
function.
NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as Perl_custom_op_xop with an aTHX_ parameter.
- const XOP * Perl_custom_op_xop(pTHX_ const OP *o)
Temporarily disable a member of the XOP, by clearing the appropriate flag.
- void XopDISABLE(XOP *xop, which)
Reenable a member of the XOP which has been disabled.
- void XopENABLE(XOP *xop, which)
Return a member of the XOP structure. which
is a cpp token
indicating which entry to return. If the member is not set
this will return a default value. The return type depends
on which
. This macro evaluates its arguments more than
once. If you are using Perl_custom_op_xop
to retreive a
XOP *
from a OP *
, use the more efficient XopENTRYCUSTOM instead.
- XopENTRY(XOP *xop, which)
Exactly like XopENTRY(XopENTRY(Perl_custom_op_xop(aTHX_ o), which)
but more
efficient. The which
parameter is identical to XopENTRY.
- XopENTRYCUSTOM(const OP *o, which)
Set a member of the XOP structure. which
is a cpp token
indicating which entry to set. See Custom Operators in perlguts
for details about the available members and how
they are used. This macro evaluates its argument
more than once.
- void XopENTRY_set(XOP *xop, which, value)
Return the XOP's flags.
- U32 XopFLAGS(XOP *xop)
This section documents functions to manipulate CVs which are code-values, or subroutines. For more information, see perlguts.
The XSUB-writer's equivalent of caller. The
returned PERL_CONTEXT
structure can be interrogated to find all the
information returned to Perl by caller. Note that XSUBs don't get a
stack frame, so caller_cx(0, NULL)
will return information for the
immediately-surrounding Perl code.
This function skips over the automatic calls to &DB::sub
made on the
behalf of the debugger. If the stack frame requested was a sub called by
DB::sub
, the return value will be the frame for the call to
DB::sub
, since that has the correct line number/etc. for the call
site. If dbcxp is non-NULL
, it will be set to a pointer to the
frame for the sub call itself.
- const PERL_CONTEXT * caller_cx(
- I32 level,
- const PERL_CONTEXT **dbcxp
- )
Returns the stash of the CV. A stash is the symbol table hash, containing the package-scoped variables in the package where the subroutine was defined. For more information, see perlguts.
This also has a special use with XS AUTOLOAD subs. See Autoloading with XSUBs in perlguts.
- HV* CvSTASH(CV* cv)
Locate the CV corresponding to the currently executing sub or eval.
If db_seqp
is non_null, skip CVs that are in the DB package and populate
*db_seqp
with the cop sequence number at the point that the DB:: code was
entered. (This allows debuggers to eval in the scope of the breakpoint
rather than in the scope of the debugger itself.)
- CV* find_runcv(U32 *db_seqp)
Uses strlen
to get the length of name
, then calls get_cvn_flags
.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- CV* get_cv(const char* name, I32 flags)
Returns the CV of the specified Perl subroutine. flags
are passed to
gv_fetchpvn_flags
. If GV_ADD
is set and the Perl subroutine does not
exist then it will be declared (which has the same effect as saying
sub name;
). If GV_ADD
is not set and the subroutine does not exist
then NULL is returned.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- CV* get_cvn_flags(const char* name, STRLEN len,
- I32 flags)
xsubpp
variables and internal functionsVariable which is setup by xsubpp
to indicate the stack base offset,
used by the ST
, XSprePUSH
and XSRETURN
macros. The dMARK
macro
must be called prior to setup the MARK
variable.
- I32 ax
Variable which is setup by xsubpp
to indicate the
class name for a C++ XS constructor. This is always a char*
. See
THIS.
- char* CLASS
Sets up the ax
variable.
This is usually handled automatically by xsubpp
by calling dXSARGS
.
- dAX;
Sets up the ax
variable and stack marker variable mark
.
This is usually handled automatically by xsubpp
by calling dXSARGS
.
- dAXMARK;
Sets up the items
variable.
This is usually handled automatically by xsubpp
by calling dXSARGS
.
- dITEMS;
Sets up any variable needed by the UNDERBAR
macro. It used to define
padoff_du
, but it is currently a noop. However, it is strongly advised
to still use it for ensuring past and future compatibility.
- dUNDERBAR;
Sets up stack and mark pointers for an XSUB, calling dSP
and dMARK
.
Sets up the ax
and items
variables by calling dAX
and dITEMS
.
This is usually handled automatically by xsubpp
.
- dXSARGS;
Sets up the ix
variable for an XSUB which has aliases. This is usually
handled automatically by xsubpp
.
- dXSI32;
Variable which is setup by xsubpp
to indicate the number of
items on the stack. See Variable-length Parameter Lists in perlxs.
- I32 items
Variable which is setup by xsubpp
to indicate which of an
XSUB's aliases was used to invoke it. See The ALIAS: Keyword in perlxs.
- I32 ix
Variable which is setup by xsubpp
to hold the return value for an
XSUB. This is always the proper type for the XSUB. See
The RETVAL Variable in perlxs.
- (whatever) RETVAL
Used to access elements on the XSUB's stack.
- SV* ST(int ix)
Variable which is setup by xsubpp
to designate the object in a C++
XSUB. This is always the proper type for the C++ object. See CLASS and
Using XS With C++ in perlxs.
- (whatever) THIS
The SV* corresponding to the $_
variable. Works even if there
is a lexical $_
in scope.
Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list. This is handled by
xsubpp
. It is the same as using the more explicit XS_EXTERNAL
macro.
Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list explicitly exporting the symbols.
Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list without exporting the symbols.
This is handled by xsubpp
and generally preferable over exporting the XSUB
symbols unnecessarily.
Dumps the entire optree of the current program starting at PL_main_root
to
STDERR
. Also dumps the optrees for all visible subroutines in
PL_defstash
.
- void dump_all()
Dumps the optrees for all visible subroutines in stash
.
- void dump_packsubs(const HV* stash)
Given an op, determine what type of struct it has been allocated as. Returns one of the OPclass enums, such as OPclass_LISTOP.
- OPclass op_class(const OP *o)
Dumps the optree starting at OP o
to STDERR
.
- void op_dump(const OP *o)
Dumps the contents of an SV to the STDERR
filehandle.
For an example of its output, see Devel::Peek.
- void sv_dump(SV* sv)
Similar to
- pv_escape(dsv,pv,cur,pvlim,PERL_PV_ESCAPE_QUOTE);
except that an additional "\0" will be appended to the string when len > cur and pv[cur] is "\0".
Note that the final string may be up to 7 chars longer than pvlim.
- char* pv_display(SV *dsv, const char *pv, STRLEN cur,
- STRLEN len, STRLEN pvlim)
Escapes at most the first count
chars of pv
and puts the results into
dsv
such that the size of the escaped string will not exceed max
chars
and will not contain any incomplete escape sequences. The number of bytes
escaped will be returned in the STRLEN *escaped
parameter if it is not null.
When the dsv
parameter is null no escaping actually occurs, but the number
of bytes that would be escaped were it not null will be calculated.
If flags contains PERL_PV_ESCAPE_QUOTE
then any double quotes in the string
will also be escaped.
Normally the SV will be cleared before the escaped string is prepared,
but when PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NOCLEAR
is set this will not occur.
If PERL_PV_ESCAPE_UNI
is set then the input string is treated as UTF-8
if PERL_PV_ESCAPE_UNI_DETECT
is set then the input string is scanned
using is_utf8_string()
to determine if it is UTF-8.
If PERL_PV_ESCAPE_ALL
is set then all input chars will be output
using \x01F1
style escapes, otherwise if PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NONASCII
is set, only
non-ASCII chars will be escaped using this style; otherwise, only chars above
255 will be so escaped; other non printable chars will use octal or
common escaped patterns like \n
.
Otherwise, if PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NOBACKSLASH
then all chars below 255 will be treated as printable and
will be output as literals.
If PERL_PV_ESCAPE_FIRSTCHAR
is set then only the first char of the
string will be escaped, regardless of max. If the output is to be in hex,
then it will be returned as a plain hex
sequence. Thus the output will either be a single char,
an octal escape sequence, a special escape like \n
or a hex value.
If PERL_PV_ESCAPE_RE
is set then the escape char used will be a "%"
and
not a "\\"
. This is because regexes very often contain backslashed
sequences, whereas "%"
is not a particularly common character in patterns.
Returns a pointer to the escaped text as held by dsv
.
- char* pv_escape(SV *dsv, char const * const str,
- const STRLEN count, const STRLEN max,
- STRLEN * const escaped,
- const U32 flags)
Converts a string into something presentable, handling escaping via
pv_escape()
and supporting quoting and ellipses.
If the PERL_PV_PRETTY_QUOTE
flag is set then the result will be
double quoted with any double quotes in the string escaped. Otherwise
if the PERL_PV_PRETTY_LTGT
flag is set then the result be wrapped in
angle brackets.
If the PERL_PV_PRETTY_ELLIPSES
flag is set and not all characters in
string were output then an ellipsis ...
will be appended to the
string. Note that this happens AFTER it has been quoted.
If start_color
is non-null then it will be inserted after the opening
quote (if there is one) but before the escaped text. If end_color
is non-null then it will be inserted after the escaped text but before
any quotes or ellipses.
Returns a pointer to the prettified text as held by dsv
.
- char* pv_pretty(SV *dsv, char const * const str,
- const STRLEN count, const STRLEN max,
- char const * const start_color,
- char const * const end_color,
- const U32 flags)
Clone a CV, making a lexical closure. proto
supplies the prototype
of the function: its code, pad structure, and other attributes.
The prototype is combined with a capture of outer lexicals to which the
code refers, which are taken from the currently-executing instance of
the immediately surrounding code.
- CV * cv_clone(CV *proto)
Returns an SV containing the name of the CV, mainly for use in error reporting. The CV may actually be a GV instead, in which case the returned SV holds the GV's name. Anything other than a GV or CV is treated as a string already holding the sub name, but this could change in the future.
An SV may be passed as a second argument. If so, the name will be assigned to it and it will be returned. Otherwise the returned SV will be a new mortal.
If flags
has the CV_NAME_NOTQUAL
bit set, then the package name will not be
included. If the first argument is neither a CV nor a GV, this flag is
ignored (subject to change).
- SV * cv_name(CV *cv, SV *sv, U32 flags)
Clear out all the active components of a CV. This can happen either
by an explicit undef &foo
, or by the reference count going to zero.
In the former case, we keep the CvOUTSIDE
pointer, so that any anonymous
children can still follow the full lexical scope chain.
- void cv_undef(CV* cv)
Returns the global variable $_
.
- SV * find_rundefsv()
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Until the lexical $_
feature was removed, this function would
find the position of the lexical $_
in the pad of the
currently-executing function and returns the offset in the current pad,
or NOT_IN_PAD
.
Now it always returns NOT_IN_PAD
.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- PADOFFSET find_rundefsvoffset()
"Introduce" my variables to visible status. This is called during parsing
at the end of each statement to make lexical variables visible to subsequent
statements.
- U32 intro_my()
Loads the module whose name is pointed to by the string part of name
.
Note that the actual module name, not its filename, should be given.
Eg, "Foo::Bar" instead of "Foo/Bar.pm". ver, if specified and not NULL,
provides version semantics similar to use Foo::Bar VERSION
. The optional
trailing arguments can be used to specify arguments to the module's import()
method, similar to use Foo::Bar VERSION LIST
; their precise handling depends
on the flags. The flags argument is a bitwise-ORed collection of any of
PERL_LOADMOD_DENY
, PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT
, or PERL_LOADMOD_IMPORT_OPS
(or 0 for no flags).
If PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT
is set, the module is loaded as if with an empty
import list, as in use Foo::Bar ()
; this is the only circumstance in which
the trailing optional arguments may be omitted entirely. Otherwise, if
PERL_LOADMOD_IMPORT_OPS
is set, the trailing arguments must consist of
exactly one OP*
, containing the op tree that produces the relevant import
arguments. Otherwise, the trailing arguments must all be SV*
values that
will be used as import arguments; and the list must be terminated with (SV*)
NULL
. If neither PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT
nor PERL_LOADMOD_IMPORT_OPS
is
set, the trailing NULL
pointer is needed even if no import arguments are
desired. The reference count for each specified SV*
argument is
decremented. In addition, the name
argument is modified.
If PERL_LOADMOD_DENY
is set, the module is loaded as if with no rather
than use.
- void load_module(U32 flags, SV* name, SV* ver, ...)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Creates a new pad name list. max
is the highest index for which space
is allocated.
- PADNAMELIST * newPADNAMELIST(size_t max)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Constructs and returns a new pad name. Only use this function for names
that refer to outer lexicals. (See also newPADNAMEpvn.) outer
is
the outer pad name that this one mirrors. The returned pad name has the
PADNAMEt_OUTER
flag already set.
- PADNAME * newPADNAMEouter(PADNAME *outer)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Constructs and returns a new pad name. s must be a UTF-8 string. Do not
use this for pad names that point to outer lexicals. See
newPADNAMEouter.
- PADNAME * newPADNAMEpvn(const char *s, STRLEN len)
Stub that provides thread hook for perl_destruct when there are no threads.
- int nothreadhook()
Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad (via pad_alloc)
for an anonymous function that is lexically scoped inside the
currently-compiling function.
The function func
is linked into the pad, and its CvOUTSIDE
link
to the outer scope is weakened to avoid a reference loop.
One reference count is stolen, so you may need to do SvREFCNT_inc(func)
.
optype
should be an opcode indicating the type of operation that the
pad entry is to support. This doesn't affect operational semantics,
but is used for debugging.
- PADOFFSET pad_add_anon(CV *func, I32 optype)
Exactly like pad_add_name_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pv(const char *name, U32 flags,
- HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad for a named lexical variable. Stores the name and other metadata in the name part of the pad, and makes preparations to manage the variable's lexical scoping. Returns the offset of the allocated pad slot.
namepv
/namelen
specify the variable's name, including leading sigil.
If typestash
is non-null, the name is for a typed lexical, and this
identifies the type. If ourstash
is non-null, it's a lexical reference
to a package variable, and this identifies the package. The following
flags can be OR'ed together:
Exactly like pad_add_name_pvn, but takes the name string in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
- PADOFFSET pad_add_name_sv(SV *name, U32 flags,
- HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad,
returning the offset of the allocated pad slot.
No name is initially attached to the pad slot.
tmptype
is a set of flags indicating the kind of pad entry required,
which will be set in the value SV for the allocated pad entry:
- SVs_PADMY named lexical variable ("my", "our", "state")
- SVs_PADTMP unnamed temporary store
- SVf_READONLY constant shared between recursion levels
SVf_READONLY
has been supported here only since perl 5.20. To work with
earlier versions as well, use SVf_READONLY|SVs_PADTMP
. SVf_READONLY
does not cause the SV in the pad slot to be marked read-only, but simply
tells pad_alloc
that it will be made read-only (by the caller), or at
least should be treated as such.
optype
should be an opcode indicating the type of operation that the
pad entry is to support. This doesn't affect operational semantics,
but is used for debugging.
- PADOFFSET pad_alloc(I32 optype, U32 tmptype)
Exactly like pad_findmy_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pv(const char *name, U32 flags)
Given the name of a lexical variable, find its position in the
currently-compiling pad.
namepv
/namelen
specify the variable's name, including leading sigil.
flags
is reserved and must be zero.
If it is not in the current pad but appears in the pad of any lexically
enclosing scope, then a pseudo-entry for it is added in the current pad.
Returns the offset in the current pad,
or NOT_IN_PAD
if no such lexical is in scope.
- PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pvn(const char *namepv,
- STRLEN namelen, U32 flags)
Exactly like pad_findmy_pvn, but takes the name string in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
- PADOFFSET pad_findmy_sv(SV *name, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Fetches the pad name from the given index.
- PADNAME * padnamelist_fetch(PADNAMELIST *pnl,
- SSize_t key)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Stores the pad name (which may be null) at the given index, freeing any existing pad name in that slot.
- PADNAME ** padnamelist_store(PADNAMELIST *pnl,
- SSize_t key, PADNAME *val)
Set the value at offset po
in the current (compiling or executing) pad.
Use the macro PAD_SETSV()
rather than calling this function directly.
- void pad_setsv(PADOFFSET po, SV *sv)
Get the value at offset po
in the current (compiling or executing) pad.
Use macro PAD_SV
instead of calling this function directly.
- SV * pad_sv(PADOFFSET po)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Tidy up a pad at the end of compilation of the code to which it belongs.
Jobs performed here are: remove most stuff from the pads of anonsub
prototypes; give it a @_
; mark temporaries as such. type
indicates
the kind of subroutine:
Allocates a new Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
- PerlInterpreter* perl_alloc()
Initializes a new Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
- void perl_construct(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
Shuts down a Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
- int perl_destruct(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
Releases a Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
- void perl_free(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
Tells a Perl interpreter to parse a Perl script. See perlembed.
Tells a Perl interpreter to run. See perlembed.
- int perl_run(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
Tells Perl to require the file named by the string argument. It is
analogous to the Perl code eval "require '$file'"
. It's even
implemented that way; consider using load_module instead.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- void require_pv(const char* pv)
Set up necessary local variables for exception handling. See Exception Handling in perlguts.
- dXCPT;
Introduces a catch block. See Exception Handling in perlguts.
Rethrows a previously caught exception. See Exception Handling in perlguts.
- XCPT_RETHROW;
Ends a try block. See Exception Handling in perlguts.
Starts a try block. See Exception Handling in perlguts.
Saves the current GP of gv on the save stack to be restored on scope exit.
If empty is true, replace the GP with a new GP.
If empty is false, mark gv with GVf_INTRO so the next reference
assigned is localized, which is how local *foo = $someref;
works.
- void save_gp(GV* gv, I32 empty)
Returns a new version object based on the passed in SV:
- SV *sv = new_version(SV *ver);
Does not alter the passed in ver SV. See "upg_version" if you want to upgrade the SV.
- SV* new_version(SV *ver)
Validate that a given string can be parsed as a version object, but doesn't actually perform the parsing. Can use either strict or lax validation rules. Can optionally set a number of hint variables to save the parsing code some time when tokenizing.
Returns a pointer to the next character after the parsed version string, as well as upgrading the passed in SV to an RV.
Function must be called with an already existing SV like
- sv = newSV(0);
- s = scan_version(s, SV *sv, bool qv);
Performs some preprocessing to the string to ensure that it has the correct characteristics of a version. Flags the object if it contains an underscore (which denotes this is an alpha version). The boolean qv denotes that the version should be interpreted as if it had multiple decimals, even if it doesn't.
- const char* scan_version(const char *s, SV *rv, bool qv)
In-place upgrade of the supplied SV to a version object.
- SV *sv = upg_version(SV *sv, bool qv);
Returns a pointer to the upgraded SV. Set the boolean qv if you want to force this SV to be interpreted as an "extended" version.
- SV* upg_version(SV *ver, bool qv)
Version object aware cmp. Both operands must already have been converted into version objects.
- int vcmp(SV *lhv, SV *rhv)
Accepts a version object and returns the normalized string representation. Call like:
- sv = vnormal(rv);
NOTE: you can pass either the object directly or the SV contained within the RV.
The SV returned has a refcount of 1.
- SV* vnormal(SV *vs)
Accepts a version object and returns the normalized floating point representation. Call like:
- sv = vnumify(rv);
NOTE: you can pass either the object directly or the SV contained within the RV.
The SV returned has a refcount of 1.
- SV* vnumify(SV *vs)
In order to maintain maximum compatibility with earlier versions of Perl, this function will return either the floating point notation or the multiple dotted notation, depending on whether the original version contained 1 or more dots, respectively.
The SV returned has a refcount of 1.
- SV* vstringify(SV *vs)
Validates that the SV contains valid internal structure for a version object. It may be passed either the version object (RV) or the hash itself (HV). If the structure is valid, it returns the HV. If the structure is invalid, it returns NULL.
- SV *hv = vverify(sv);
Note that it only confirms the bare minimum structure (so as not to get confused by derived classes which may contain additional hash entries):
- SV* vverify(SV *vs)
Used to indicate list context. See GIMME_V, GIMME and
perlcall.
Indicates that arguments returned from a callback should be discarded. See perlcall.
Used to force a Perl eval wrapper around a callback. See
perlcall.
A backward-compatible version of GIMME_V
which can only return
G_SCALAR
or G_ARRAY
; in a void context, it returns G_SCALAR
.
Deprecated. Use GIMME_V
instead.
- U32 GIMME
The XSUB-writer's equivalent to Perl's wantarray. Returns G_VOID
,
G_SCALAR
or G_ARRAY
for void, scalar or list context,
respectively. See perlcall for a usage example.
- U32 GIMME_V
Indicates that no arguments are being sent to a callback. See perlcall.
Used to indicate scalar context. See GIMME_V, GIMME, and
perlcall.
These variables are global to an entire process. They are shared between all interpreters and all threads in a process. Any variables not documented here may be changed or removed without notice, so don't use them! If you feel you really do need to use an unlisted variable, first send email to [email protected]. It may be that someone there will point out a way to accomplish what you need without using an internal variable. But if not, you should get a go-ahead to document and then use the variable.
Array, indexed by opcode, of functions that will be called for the "check" phase of optree building during compilation of Perl code. For most (but not all) types of op, once the op has been initially built and populated with child ops it will be filtered through the check function referenced by the appropriate element of this array. The new op is passed in as the sole argument to the check function, and the check function returns the completed op. The check function may (as the name suggests) check the op for validity and signal errors. It may also initialise or modify parts of the ops, or perform more radical surgery such as adding or removing child ops, or even throw the op away and return a different op in its place.
This array of function pointers is a convenient place to hook into the compilation process. An XS module can put its own custom check function in place of any of the standard ones, to influence the compilation of a particular type of op. However, a custom check function must never fully replace a standard check function (or even a custom check function from another module). A module modifying checking must instead wrap the preexisting check function. A custom check function must be selective about when to apply its custom behaviour. In the usual case where it decides not to do anything special with an op, it must chain the preexisting op function. Check functions are thus linked in a chain, with the core's base checker at the end.
For thread safety, modules should not write directly to this array. Instead, use the function wrap_op_checker.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Function pointer, pointing at a function used to handle extended keywords. The function should be declared as
- int keyword_plugin_function(pTHX_
- char *keyword_ptr, STRLEN keyword_len,
- OP **op_ptr)
The function is called from the tokeniser, whenever a possible keyword
is seen. keyword_ptr
points at the word in the parser's input
buffer, and keyword_len
gives its length; it is not null-terminated.
The function is expected to examine the word, and possibly other state
such as %^H, to decide whether it wants to handle it
as an extended keyword. If it does not, the function should return
KEYWORD_PLUGIN_DECLINE
, and the normal parser process will continue.
If the function wants to handle the keyword, it first must parse anything following the keyword that is part of the syntax introduced by the keyword. See Lexer interface for details.
When a keyword is being handled, the plugin function must build
a tree of OP
structures, representing the code that was parsed.
The root of the tree must be stored in *op_ptr
. The function then
returns a constant indicating the syntactic role of the construct that
it has parsed: KEYWORD_PLUGIN_STMT
if it is a complete statement, or
KEYWORD_PLUGIN_EXPR
if it is an expression. Note that a statement
construct cannot be used inside an expression (except via do BLOCK
and similar), and an expression is not a complete statement (it requires
at least a terminating semicolon).
When a keyword is handled, the plugin function may also have
(compile-time) side effects. It may modify %^H
, define functions, and
so on. Typically, if side effects are the main purpose of a handler,
it does not wish to generate any ops to be included in the normal
compilation. In this case it is still required to supply an op tree,
but it suffices to generate a single null op.
That's how the *PL_keyword_plugin
function needs to behave overall.
Conventionally, however, one does not completely replace the existing
handler function. Instead, take a copy of PL_keyword_plugin
before
assigning your own function pointer to it. Your handler function should
look for keywords that it is interested in and handle those. Where it
is not interested, it should call the saved plugin function, passing on
the arguments it received. Thus PL_keyword_plugin
actually points
at a chain of handler functions, all of which have an opportunity to
handle keywords, and only the last function in the chain (built into
the Perl core) will normally return KEYWORD_PLUGIN_DECLINE
.
A GV is a structure which corresponds to to a Perl typeglob, ie *foo. It is a structure that holds a pointer to a scalar, an array, a hash etc, corresponding to $foo, @foo, %foo.
GVs are usually found as values in stashes (symbol table hashes) where Perl stores its global variables.
Return the AV from the GV.
- AV* GvAV(GV* gv)
If gv
is a typeglob whose subroutine entry is a constant sub eligible for
inlining, or gv
is a placeholder reference that would be promoted to such
a typeglob, then returns the value returned by the sub. Otherwise, returns
NULL
.
- SV* gv_const_sv(GV* gv)
Return the CV from the GV.
- CV* GvCV(GV* gv)
Like gv_fetchmeth_pvn, but lacks a flags parameter.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth(HV* stash, const char* name,
- STRLEN len, I32 level)
Returns the glob which contains the subroutine to call to invoke the method
on the stash
. In fact in the presence of autoloading this may be the
glob for "AUTOLOAD". In this case the corresponding variable $AUTOLOAD
is
already setup.
The third parameter of gv_fetchmethod_autoload
determines whether
AUTOLOAD lookup is performed if the given method is not present: non-zero
means yes, look for AUTOLOAD; zero means no, don't look for AUTOLOAD.
Calling gv_fetchmethod
is equivalent to calling gv_fetchmethod_autoload
with a non-zero autoload
parameter.
These functions grant "SUPER"
token
as a prefix of the method name. Note
that if you want to keep the returned glob for a long time, you need to
check for it being "AUTOLOAD", since at the later time the call may load a
different subroutine due to $AUTOLOAD
changing its value. Use the glob
created as a side effect to do this.
These functions have the same side-effects as gv_fetchmeth
with
level==0
. The warning against passing the GV returned by
gv_fetchmeth
to call_sv
applies equally to these functions.
- GV* gv_fetchmethod_autoload(HV* stash,
- const char* name,
- I32 autoload)
This is the old form of gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload, which has no flags parameter.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_autoload(HV* stash,
- const char* name,
- STRLEN len, I32 level)
Exactly like gv_fetchmeth_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_pv(HV* stash, const char* name,
- I32 level, U32 flags)
Returns the glob with the given name
and a defined subroutine or
NULL
. The glob lives in the given stash
, or in the stashes
accessible via @ISA
and UNIVERSAL::
.
The argument level
should be either 0 or -1. If level==0
, as a
side-effect creates a glob with the given name
in the given stash
which in the case of success contains an alias for the subroutine, and sets
up caching info for this glob.
The only significant values for flags
are GV_SUPER
and SVf_UTF8
.
GV_SUPER
indicates that we want to look up the method in the superclasses
of the stash
.
The
GV returned from gv_fetchmeth
may be a method cache entry, which is not
visible to Perl code. So when calling call_sv
, you should not use
the GV directly; instead, you should use the method's CV, which can be
obtained from the GV with the GvCV
macro.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_pvn(HV* stash, const char* name,
- STRLEN len, I32 level,
- U32 flags)
Same as gv_fetchmeth_pvn()
, but looks for autoloaded subroutines too.
Returns a glob for the subroutine.
For an autoloaded subroutine without a GV, will create a GV even
if level < 0
. For an autoloaded subroutine without a stub, GvCV()
of the result may be zero.
Currently, the only significant value for flags
is SVf_UTF8
.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload(HV* stash,
- const char* name,
- STRLEN len, I32 level,
- U32 flags)
Exactly like gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_pv_autoload(HV* stash,
- const char* name,
- I32 level, U32 flags)
Exactly like gv_fetchmeth_pvn, but takes the name string in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_sv(HV* stash, SV* namesv,
- I32 level, U32 flags)
Exactly like gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload, but takes the name string in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
- GV* gv_fetchmeth_sv_autoload(HV* stash, SV* namesv,
- I32 level, U32 flags)
Return the HV from the GV.
- HV* GvHV(GV* gv)
The old form of gv_init_pvn()
. It does not work with UTF-8 strings, as it
has no flags parameter. If the multi
parameter is set, the
GV_ADDMULTI
flag will be passed to gv_init_pvn()
.
- void gv_init(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
- STRLEN len, int multi)
Same as gv_init_pvn()
, but takes a nul-terminated string for the name
instead of separate char * and length parameters.
- void gv_init_pv(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
- U32 flags)
Converts a scalar into a typeglob. This is an incoercible typeglob;
assigning a reference to it will assign to one of its slots, instead of
overwriting it as happens with typeglobs created by SvSetSV
. Converting
any scalar that is SvOK()
may produce unpredictable results and is reserved
for perl's internal use.
gv
is the scalar to be converted.
stash
is the parent stash/package, if any.
name
and len
give the name. The name must be unqualified;
that is, it must not include the package name. If gv
is a
stash element, it is the caller's responsibility to ensure that the name
passed to this function matches the name of the element. If it does not
match, perl's internal bookkeeping will get out of sync.
flags
can be set to SVf_UTF8
if name
is a UTF-8 string, or
the return value of SvUTF8(sv). It can also take the
GV_ADDMULTI
flag, which means to pretend that the GV has been
seen before (i.e., suppress "Used once" warnings).
- void gv_init_pvn(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
- STRLEN len, U32 flags)
Same as gv_init_pvn()
, but takes an SV * for the name instead of separate
char * and length parameters. flags
is currently unused.
- void gv_init_sv(GV* gv, HV* stash, SV* namesv,
- U32 flags)
Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package. Uses strlen
to
determine the length of name
, then calls gv_stashpvn()
.
- HV* gv_stashpv(const char* name, I32 flags)
Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package. The namelen
parameter indicates the length of the name
, in bytes. flags
is passed
to gv_fetchpvn_flags()
, so if set to GV_ADD
then the package will be
created if it does not already exist. If the package does not exist and
flags
is 0 (or any other setting that does not create packages) then NULL
is returned.
Flags may be one of:
- GV_ADD
- SVf_UTF8
- GV_NOADD_NOINIT
- GV_NOINIT
- GV_NOEXPAND
- GV_ADDMG
The most important of which are probably GV_ADD
and SVf_UTF8
.
Note, use of gv_stashsv
instead of gv_stashpvn
where possible is strongly
recommended for performance reasons.
- HV* gv_stashpvn(const char* name, U32 namelen,
- I32 flags)
Like gv_stashpvn
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- HV* gv_stashpvs(const char* name, I32 create)
Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package. See
gv_stashpvn.
Note this interface is strongly preferred over gv_stashpvn
for performance
reasons.
- HV* gv_stashsv(SV* sv, I32 flags)
Return the SV from the GV.
- SV* GvSV(GV* gv)
Sets PL_defoutgv
, the default file handle for output, to the passed in
typeglob. As PL_defoutgv
"owns" a reference on its typeglob, the reference
count of the passed in typeglob is increased by one, and the reference count
of the typeglob that PL_defoutgv
points to is decreased by one.
- void setdefout(GV* gv)
Null AV pointer.
(deprecated - use (AV *)NULL instead)
Null character pointer. (No longer available when PERL_CORE
is
defined.)
Null CV pointer.
(deprecated - use (CV *)NULL instead)
Null HV pointer.
(deprecated - use (HV *)NULL instead)
Null SV pointer. (No longer available when PERL_CORE
is defined.)
A HV structure represents a Perl hash. It consists mainly of an array of pointers, each of which points to a linked list of HE structures. The array is indexed by the hash function of the key, so each linked list represents all the hash entries with the same hash value. Each HE contains a pointer to the actual value, plus a pointer to a HEK structure which holds the key and hash value.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Returns the label attached to a cop.
The flags pointer may be set to SVf_UTF8
or 0.
- const char * cop_fetch_label(COP *const cop,
- STRLEN *len, U32 *flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Save a label into a cop_hints_hash
.
You need to set flags to SVf_UTF8
for a UTF-8 label.
- void cop_store_label(COP *const cop,
- const char *label, STRLEN len,
- U32 flags)
Returns the HV of the specified Perl hash. flags
are passed to
gv_fetchpv
. If GV_ADD
is set and the
Perl variable does not exist then it will be created. If flags
is zero
and the variable does not exist then NULL
is returned.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- HV* get_hv(const char *name, I32 flags)
This flag, used in the length slot of hash entries and magic structures,
specifies the structure contains an SV*
pointer where a char*
pointer
is to be expected. (For information only--not to be used).
Returns the computed hash stored in the hash entry.
- U32 HeHASH(HE* he)
Returns the actual pointer stored in the key slot of the hash entry. The
pointer may be either char*
or SV*
, depending on the value of
HeKLEN()
. Can be assigned to. The HePV()
or HeSVKEY()
macros are
usually preferable for finding the value of a key.
- void* HeKEY(HE* he)
If this is negative, and amounts to HEf_SVKEY
, it indicates the entry
holds an SV*
key. Otherwise, holds the actual length of the key. Can
be assigned to. The HePV()
macro is usually preferable for finding key
lengths.
- STRLEN HeKLEN(HE* he)
Returns the key slot of the hash entry as a char*
value, doing any
necessary dereferencing of possibly SV*
keys. The length of the string
is placed in len
(this is a macro, so do not use &len
). If you do
not care about what the length of the key is, you may use the global
variable PL_na
, though this is rather less efficient than using a local
variable. Remember though, that hash keys in perl are free to contain
embedded nulls, so using strlen()
or similar is not a good way to find
the length of hash keys. This is very similar to the SvPV()
macro
described elsewhere in this document. See also HeUTF8.
If you are using HePV
to get values to pass to newSVpvn()
to create a
new SV, you should consider using newSVhek(HeKEY_hek(he))
as it is more
efficient.
- char* HePV(HE* he, STRLEN len)
Returns the key as an SV*
, or NULL
if the hash entry does not
contain an SV*
key.
- SV* HeSVKEY(HE* he)
Returns the key as an SV*
. Will create and return a temporary mortal
SV*
if the hash entry contains only a char*
key.
- SV* HeSVKEY_force(HE* he)
Sets the key to a given SV*
, taking care to set the appropriate flags to
indicate the presence of an SV*
key, and returns the same
SV*
.
- SV* HeSVKEY_set(HE* he, SV* sv)
Returns whether the char *
value returned by HePV
is encoded in UTF-8,
doing any necessary dereferencing of possibly SV*
keys. The value returned
will be 0 or non-0, not necessarily 1 (or even a value with any low bits set),
so do not blindly assign this to a bool
variable, as bool
may be a
typedef for char
.
- U32 HeUTF8(HE* he)
Returns the value slot (type SV*
)
stored in the hash entry. Can be assigned
to.
- SV *foo= HeVAL(hv);
- HeVAL(hv)= sv;
- SV* HeVAL(HE* he)
Check that a hash is in an internally consistent state.
- void hv_assert(HV *hv)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
If the hash is tied dispatches through to the SCALAR tied method, otherwise if the hash contains no keys returns 0, otherwise returns a mortal sv containing a string specifying the number of used buckets, followed by a slash, followed by the number of available buckets.
This function is expensive, it must scan all of the buckets to determine which are used, and the count is NOT cached. In a large hash this could be a lot of buckets.
- SV* hv_bucket_ratio(HV *hv)
Frees the all the elements of a hash, leaving it empty.
The XS equivalent of %hash = ()
. See also hv_undef.
See av_clear for a note about the hash possibly being invalid on return.
- void hv_clear(HV *hv)
Clears any placeholders from a hash. If a restricted hash has any of its keys
marked as readonly and the key is subsequently deleted, the key is not actually
deleted but is marked by assigning it a value of &PL_sv_placeholder
. This tags
it so it will be ignored by future operations such as iterating over the hash,
but will still allow the hash to have a value reassigned to the key at some
future point. This function clears any such placeholder keys from the hash.
See Hash::Util::lock_keys() for an example of its
use.
- void hv_clear_placeholders(HV *hv)
A specialised version of newHVhv for copying %^H
. ohv
must be
a pointer to a hash (which may have %^H
magic, but should be generally
non-magical), or NULL
(interpreted as an empty hash). The content
of ohv
is copied to a new hash, which has the %^H
-specific magic
added to it. A pointer to the new hash is returned.
- HV * hv_copy_hints_hv(HV *ohv)
Deletes a key/value pair in the hash. The value's SV is removed from
the hash, made mortal, and returned to the caller. The absolute
value of klen
is the length of the key. If klen
is negative the
key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded Unicode. The flags
value
will normally be zero; if set to G_DISCARD
then NULL
will be returned.
NULL
will also be returned if the key is not found.
- SV* hv_delete(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
- I32 flags)
Deletes a key/value pair in the hash. The value SV is removed from the hash,
made mortal, and returned to the caller. The flags
value will normally be
zero; if set to G_DISCARD
then NULL
will be returned. NULL
will also
be returned if the key is not found. hash
can be a valid precomputed hash
value, or 0 to ask for it to be computed.
- SV* hv_delete_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, I32 flags,
- U32 hash)
Returns the effective name of a stash, or NULL if there is none. The
effective name represents a location in the symbol table where this stash
resides. It is updated automatically when packages are aliased or deleted.
A stash that is no longer in the symbol table has no effective name. This
name is preferable to HvNAME
for use in MRO linearisations and isa
caches.
- char* HvENAME(HV* stash)
Returns the length of the stash's effective name.
- STRLEN HvENAMELEN(HV *stash)
Returns true if the effective name is in UTF-8 encoding.
- unsigned char HvENAMEUTF8(HV *stash)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified hash key exists. The
absolute value of klen
is the length of the key. If klen
is
negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded Unicode.
- bool hv_exists(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen)
Returns a boolean indicating whether
the specified hash key exists. hash
can be a valid precomputed hash value, or 0 to ask for it to be
computed.
- bool hv_exists_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, U32 hash)
Returns the SV which corresponds to the specified key in the hash.
The absolute value of klen
is the length of the key. If klen
is
negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded Unicode. If
lval
is set then the fetch will be part of a store. This means that if
there is no value in the hash associated with the given key, then one is
created and a pointer to it is returned. The SV*
it points to can be
assigned to. But always check that the
return value is non-null before dereferencing it to an SV*
.
See Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays in perlguts for more information on how to use this function on tied hashes.
- SV** hv_fetch(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
- I32 lval)
Like hv_fetch
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- SV** hv_fetchs(HV* tb, const char* key, I32 lval)
Returns the hash entry which corresponds to the specified key in the hash.
hash
must be a valid precomputed hash number for the given key
, or 0
if you want the function to compute it. IF lval
is set then the fetch
will be part of a store. Make sure the return value is non-null before
accessing it. The return value when hv
is a tied hash is a pointer to a
static location, so be sure to make a copy of the structure if you need to
store it somewhere.
See Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays in perlguts for more information on how to use this function on tied hashes.
- HE* hv_fetch_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, I32 lval,
- U32 hash)
Returns the number of hash buckets that happen to be in use.
This function is wrapped by the macro HvFILL
.
As of perl 5.25 this function is used only for debugging purposes, and the number of used hash buckets is not in any way cached, thus this function can be costly to execute as it must iterate over all the buckets in the hash.
- STRLEN hv_fill(HV *const hv)
Prepares a starting point to traverse a hash table. Returns the number of
keys in the hash, including placeholders (i.e. the same as HvTOTALKEYS(hv)
).
The return value is currently only meaningful for hashes without tie magic.
NOTE: Before version 5.004_65, hv_iterinit
used to return the number of
hash buckets that happen to be in use. If you still need that esoteric
value, you can get it through the macro HvFILL(hv)
.
- I32 hv_iterinit(HV *hv)
Returns the key from the current position of the hash iterator. See
hv_iterinit.
- char* hv_iterkey(HE* entry, I32* retlen)
Returns the key as an SV*
from the current position of the hash
iterator. The return value will always be a mortal copy of the key. Also
see hv_iterinit.
- SV* hv_iterkeysv(HE* entry)
Returns entries from a hash iterator. See hv_iterinit.
You may call hv_delete
or hv_delete_ent
on the hash entry that the
iterator currently points to, without losing your place or invalidating your
iterator. Note that in this case the current entry is deleted from the hash
with your iterator holding the last reference to it. Your iterator is flagged
to free the entry on the next call to hv_iternext
, so you must not discard
your iterator immediately else the entry will leak - call hv_iternext
to
trigger the resource deallocation.
- HE* hv_iternext(HV *hv)
Performs an hv_iternext
, hv_iterkey
, and hv_iterval
in one
operation.
- SV* hv_iternextsv(HV *hv, char **key, I32 *retlen)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Returns entries from a hash iterator. See hv_iterinit and
hv_iternext.
The flags
value will normally be zero; if HV_ITERNEXT_WANTPLACEHOLDERS
is
set the placeholders keys (for restricted hashes) will be returned in addition
to normal keys. By default placeholders are automatically skipped over.
Currently a placeholder is implemented with a value that is
&PL_sv_placeholder
. Note that the implementation of placeholders and
restricted hashes may change, and the implementation currently is
insufficiently abstracted for any change to be tidy.
- HE* hv_iternext_flags(HV *hv, I32 flags)
Returns the value from the current position of the hash iterator. See
hv_iterkey.
- SV* hv_iterval(HV *hv, HE *entry)
Adds magic to a hash. See sv_magic.
- void hv_magic(HV *hv, GV *gv, int how)
Returns the package name of a stash, or NULL
if stash
isn't a stash.
See SvSTASH, CvSTASH.
- char* HvNAME(HV* stash)
Returns the length of the stash's name.
- STRLEN HvNAMELEN(HV *stash)
Returns true if the name is in UTF-8 encoding.
- unsigned char HvNAMEUTF8(HV *stash)
Evaluates the hash in scalar context and returns the result.
When the hash is tied dispatches through to the SCALAR method, otherwise returns a mortal SV containing the number of keys in the hash.
Note, prior to 5.25 this function returned what is now returned by the hv_bucket_ratio() function.
- SV* hv_scalar(HV *hv)
Stores an SV in a hash. The hash key is specified as key
and the
absolute value of klen
is the length of the key. If klen
is
negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded Unicode. The
hash
parameter is the precomputed hash value; if it is zero then
Perl will compute it.
The return value will be
NULL
if the operation failed or if the value did not need to be actually
stored within the hash (as in the case of tied hashes). Otherwise it can
be dereferenced to get the original SV*
. Note that the caller is
responsible for suitably incrementing the reference count of val
before
the call, and decrementing it if the function returned NULL
. Effectively
a successful hv_store
takes ownership of one reference to val
. This is
usually what you want; a newly created SV has a reference count of one, so
if all your code does is create SVs then store them in a hash, hv_store
will own the only reference to the new SV, and your code doesn't need to do
anything further to tidy up. hv_store
is not implemented as a call to
hv_store_ent
, and does not create a temporary SV for the key, so if your
key data is not already in SV form then use hv_store
in preference to
hv_store_ent
.
See Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays in perlguts for more information on how to use this function on tied hashes.
- SV** hv_store(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
- SV *val, U32 hash)
Like hv_store
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair
and omits the hash parameter.
- SV** hv_stores(HV* tb, const char* key,
- NULLOK SV* val)
Stores val
in a hash. The hash key is specified as key
. The hash
parameter is the precomputed hash value; if it is zero then Perl will
compute it. The return value is the new hash entry so created. It will be
NULL
if the operation failed or if the value did not need to be actually
stored within the hash (as in the case of tied hashes). Otherwise the
contents of the return value can be accessed using the He? macros
described here. Note that the caller is responsible for suitably
incrementing the reference count of val
before the call, and
decrementing it if the function returned NULL. Effectively a successful
hv_store_ent
takes ownership of one reference to val
. This is
usually what you want; a newly created SV has a reference count of one, so
if all your code does is create SVs then store them in a hash, hv_store
will own the only reference to the new SV, and your code doesn't need to do
anything further to tidy up. Note that hv_store_ent
only reads the key
;
unlike val
it does not take ownership of it, so maintaining the correct
reference count on key
is entirely the caller's responsibility. hv_store
is not implemented as a call to hv_store_ent
, and does not create a temporary
SV for the key, so if your key data is not already in SV form then use
hv_store
in preference to hv_store_ent
.
See Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays in perlguts for more information on how to use this function on tied hashes.
- HE* hv_store_ent(HV *hv, SV *key, SV *val, U32 hash)
Undefines the hash. The XS equivalent of undef(%hash).
As well as freeing all the elements of the hash (like hv_clear()
), this
also frees any auxiliary data and storage associated with the hash.
See av_clear for a note about the hash possibly being invalid on return.
- void hv_undef(HV *hv)
Creates a new HV. The reference count is set to 1.
- HV* newHV()
These functions provide convenient and thread-safe means of manipulating hook variables.
Puts a C function into the chain of check functions for a specified op
type. This is the preferred way to manipulate the PL_check array.
opcode
specifies which type of op is to be affected. new_checker
is a pointer to the C function that is to be added to that opcode's
check chain, and old_checker_p
points to the storage location where a
pointer to the next function in the chain will be stored. The value of
new_pointer
is written into the PL_check array, while the value
previously stored there is written to *old_checker_p
.
The function should be defined like this:
- static OP *new_checker(pTHX_ OP *op) { ... }
It is intended to be called in this manner:
- new_checker(aTHX_ op)
old_checker_p
should be defined like this:
- static Perl_check_t old_checker_p;
PL_check is global to an entire process, and a module wishing to
hook op checking may find itself invoked more than once per process,
typically in different threads. To handle that situation, this function
is idempotent. The location *old_checker_p
must initially (once
per process) contain a null pointer. A C variable of static duration
(declared at file scope, typically also marked static
to give
it internal linkage) will be implicitly initialised appropriately,
if it does not have an explicit initialiser. This function will only
actually modify the check chain if it finds *old_checker_p
to be null.
This function is also thread safe on the small scale. It uses appropriate
locking to avoid race conditions in accessing PL_check.
When this function is called, the function referenced by new_checker
must be ready to be called, except for *old_checker_p
being unfilled.
In a threading situation, new_checker
may be called immediately,
even before this function has returned. *old_checker_p
will always
be appropriately set before new_checker
is called. If new_checker
decides not to do anything special with an op that it is given (which
is the usual case for most uses of op check hooking), it must chain the
check function referenced by *old_checker_p
.
If you want to influence compilation of calls to a specific subroutine,
then use cv_set_call_checker rather than hooking checking of all
entersub
ops.
- void wrap_op_checker(Optype opcode,
- Perl_check_t new_checker,
- Perl_check_t *old_checker_p)
This is the lower layer of the Perl parser, managing characters and tokens.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Indicates whether the octets in the lexer buffer
(PL_parser->linestr) should be interpreted as the UTF-8 encoding
of Unicode characters. If not, they should be interpreted as Latin-1
characters. This is analogous to the SvUTF8
flag for scalars.
In UTF-8 mode, it is not guaranteed that the lexer buffer actually contains valid UTF-8. Lexing code must be robust in the face of invalid encoding.
The actual SvUTF8
flag of the PL_parser->linestr scalar
is significant, but not the whole story regarding the input character
encoding. Normally, when a file is being read, the scalar contains octets
and its SvUTF8
flag is off, but the octets should be interpreted as
UTF-8 if the use utf8
pragma is in effect. During a string eval,
however, the scalar may have the SvUTF8
flag on, and in this case its
octets should be interpreted as UTF-8 unless the use bytes
pragma
is in effect. This logic may change in the future; use this function
instead of implementing the logic yourself.
- bool lex_bufutf8()
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Discards the first part of the PL_parser->linestr buffer,
up to ptr
. The remaining content of the buffer will be moved, and
all pointers into the buffer updated appropriately. ptr
must not
be later in the buffer than the position of PL_parser->bufptr:
it is not permitted to discard text that has yet to be lexed.
Normally it is not necessarily to do this directly, because it suffices to use the implicit discarding behaviour of lex_next_chunk and things based on it. However, if a token stretches across multiple lines, and the lexing code has kept multiple lines of text in the buffer for that purpose, then after completion of the token it would be wise to explicitly discard the now-unneeded earlier lines, to avoid future multi-line tokens growing the buffer without bound.
- void lex_discard_to(char *ptr)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Reallocates the lexer buffer (PL_parser->linestr) to accommodate
at least len
octets (including terminating NUL
). Returns a
pointer to the reallocated buffer. This is necessary before making
any direct modification of the buffer that would increase its length.
lex_stuff_pvn provides a more convenient way to insert text into
the buffer.
Do not use SvGROW
or sv_grow
directly on PL_parser->linestr
;
this function updates all of the lexer's variables that point directly
into the buffer.
- char * lex_grow_linestr(STRLEN len)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Reads in the next chunk of text to be lexed, appending it to PL_parser->linestr. This should be called when lexing code has looked to the end of the current chunk and wants to know more. It is usual, but not necessary, for lexing to have consumed the entirety of the current chunk at this time.
If PL_parser->bufptr is pointing to the very end of the current
chunk (i.e., the current chunk has been entirely consumed), normally the
current chunk will be discarded at the same time that the new chunk is
read in. If flags
has the LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS
bit set, the current chunk
will not be discarded. If the current chunk has not been entirely
consumed, then it will not be discarded regardless of the flag.
Returns true if some new text was added to the buffer, or false if the buffer has reached the end of the input text.
- bool lex_next_chunk(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Looks ahead one (Unicode) character in the text currently being lexed. Returns the codepoint (unsigned integer value) of the next character, or -1 if lexing has reached the end of the input text. To consume the peeked character, use lex_read_unichar.
If the next character is in (or extends into) the next chunk of input
text, the next chunk will be read in. Normally the current chunk will be
discarded at the same time, but if flags
has the LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS
bit set, then the current chunk will not be discarded.
If the input is being interpreted as UTF-8 and a UTF-8 encoding error is encountered, an exception is generated.
- I32 lex_peek_unichar(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Reads optional spaces, in Perl style, in the text currently being
lexed. The spaces may include ordinary whitespace characters and
Perl-style comments. #line
directives are processed if encountered.
PL_parser->bufptr is moved past the spaces, so that it points
at a non-space character (or the end of the input text).
If spaces extend into the next chunk of input text, the next chunk will
be read in. Normally the current chunk will be discarded at the same
time, but if flags
has the LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS
bit set, then the current
chunk will not be discarded.
- void lex_read_space(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Consume text in the lexer buffer, from PL_parser->bufptr up
to ptr
. This advances PL_parser->bufptr to match ptr
,
performing the correct bookkeeping whenever a newline character is passed.
This is the normal way to consume lexed text.
Interpretation of the buffer's octets can be abstracted out by using the slightly higher-level functions lex_peek_unichar and lex_read_unichar.
- void lex_read_to(char *ptr)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Reads the next (Unicode) character in the text currently being lexed. Returns the codepoint (unsigned integer value) of the character read, and moves PL_parser->bufptr past the character, or returns -1 if lexing has reached the end of the input text. To non-destructively examine the next character, use lex_peek_unichar instead.
If the next character is in (or extends into) the next chunk of input
text, the next chunk will be read in. Normally the current chunk will be
discarded at the same time, but if flags
has the LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS
bit set, then the current chunk will not be discarded.
If the input is being interpreted as UTF-8 and a UTF-8 encoding error is encountered, an exception is generated.
- I32 lex_read_unichar(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Creates and initialises a new lexer/parser state object, supplying a context in which to lex and parse from a new source of Perl code. A pointer to the new state object is placed in PL_parser. An entry is made on the save stack so that upon unwinding, the new state object will be destroyed and the former value of PL_parser will be restored. Nothing else need be done to clean up the parsing context.
The code to be parsed comes from line
and rsfp
. line
, if
non-null, provides a string (in SV form) containing code to be parsed.
A copy of the string is made, so subsequent modification of line
does not affect parsing. rsfp
, if non-null, provides an input stream
from which code will be read to be parsed. If both are non-null, the
code in line
comes first and must consist of complete lines of input,
and rsfp
supplies the remainder of the source.
The flags
parameter is reserved for future use. Currently it is only
used by perl internally, so extensions should always pass zero.
- void lex_start(SV *line, PerlIO *rsfp, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Insert characters into the lexer buffer (PL_parser->linestr), immediately after the current lexing point (PL_parser->bufptr), reallocating the buffer if necessary. This means that lexing code that runs later will see the characters as if they had appeared in the input. It is not recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses of this facility run the risk of the inserted characters being interpreted in an unintended manner.
The string to be inserted is represented by octets starting at pv
and continuing to the first nul. These octets are interpreted as either
UTF-8 or Latin-1, according to whether the LEX_STUFF_UTF8
flag is set
in flags
. The characters are recoded for the lexer buffer, according
to how the buffer is currently being interpreted (lex_bufutf8).
If it is not convenient to nul-terminate a string to be inserted, the
lex_stuff_pvn function is more appropriate.
- void lex_stuff_pv(const char *pv, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Insert characters into the lexer buffer (PL_parser->linestr), immediately after the current lexing point (PL_parser->bufptr), reallocating the buffer if necessary. This means that lexing code that runs later will see the characters as if they had appeared in the input. It is not recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses of this facility run the risk of the inserted characters being interpreted in an unintended manner.
The string to be inserted is represented by len
octets starting
at pv
. These octets are interpreted as either UTF-8 or Latin-1,
according to whether the LEX_STUFF_UTF8
flag is set in flags
.
The characters are recoded for the lexer buffer, according to how the
buffer is currently being interpreted (lex_bufutf8). If a string
to be inserted is available as a Perl scalar, the lex_stuff_sv
function is more convenient.
- void lex_stuff_pvn(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
- U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Like lex_stuff_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of
a string/length pair.
- void lex_stuff_pvs(const char *pv, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Insert characters into the lexer buffer (PL_parser->linestr), immediately after the current lexing point (PL_parser->bufptr), reallocating the buffer if necessary. This means that lexing code that runs later will see the characters as if they had appeared in the input. It is not recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses of this facility run the risk of the inserted characters being interpreted in an unintended manner.
The string to be inserted is the string value of sv
. The characters
are recoded for the lexer buffer, according to how the buffer is currently
being interpreted (lex_bufutf8). If a string to be inserted is
not already a Perl scalar, the lex_stuff_pvn function avoids the
need to construct a scalar.
- void lex_stuff_sv(SV *sv, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Discards text about to be lexed, from PL_parser->bufptr up to
ptr
. Text following ptr
will be moved, and the buffer shortened.
This hides the discarded text from any lexing code that runs later,
as if the text had never appeared.
This is not the normal way to consume lexed text. For that, use lex_read_to.
- void lex_unstuff(char *ptr)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a Perl arithmetic expression. This may contain operators of precedence
down to the bit shift operators. The expression must be followed (and thus
terminated) either by a comparison or lower-precedence operator or by
something that would normally terminate an expression such as semicolon.
If flags
has the PARSE_OPTIONAL
bit set, then the expression is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure that the
dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect
the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
- OP * parse_arithexpr(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a single unadorned Perl statement. This may be a normal imperative statement or a declaration that has compile-time effect. It does not include any label or other affixture. It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the statement.
The op tree representing the statement is returned. This may be a
null pointer if the statement is null, for example if it was actually
a subroutine definition (which has compile-time side effects). If not
null, it will be ops directly implementing the statement, suitable to
pass to newSTATEOP. It will not normally include a nextstate
or
equivalent op (except for those embedded in a scope contained entirely
within the statement).
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree (most likely null) is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
The flags
parameter is reserved for future use, and must always
be zero.
- OP * parse_barestmt(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a single complete Perl code block. This consists of an opening
brace, a sequence of statements, and a closing brace. The block
constitutes a lexical scope, so my variables and various compile-time
effects can be contained within it. It is up to the caller to ensure
that the dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to
reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for
the statement.
The op tree representing the code block is returned. This is always a
real op, never a null pointer. It will normally be a lineseq
list,
including nextstate
or equivalent ops. No ops to construct any kind
of runtime scope are included by virtue of it being a block.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree (most likely null) is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
The flags
parameter is reserved for future use, and must always
be zero.
- OP * parse_block(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a single complete Perl expression. This allows the full
expression grammar, including the lowest-precedence operators such
as or
. The expression must be followed (and thus terminated) by a
token that an expression would normally be terminated by: end-of-file,
closing bracketing punctuation, semicolon, or one of the keywords that
signals a postfix expression-statement modifier. If flags
has the
PARSE_OPTIONAL
bit set, then the expression is optional, otherwise it is
mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser
state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of
the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
- OP * parse_fullexpr(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a single complete Perl statement. This may be a normal imperative statement or a declaration that has compile-time effect, and may include optional labels. It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the statement.
The op tree representing the statement is returned. This may be a
null pointer if the statement is null, for example if it was actually
a subroutine definition (which has compile-time side effects). If not
null, it will be the result of a newSTATEOP call, normally including
a nextstate
or equivalent op.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree (most likely null) is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
The flags
parameter is reserved for future use, and must always
be zero.
- OP * parse_fullstmt(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a single label, possibly optional, of the type that may prefix a
Perl statement. It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser
state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of
the code to be parsed. If flags
has the PARSE_OPTIONAL
bit set, then the
label is optional, otherwise it is mandatory.
The name of the label is returned in the form of a fresh scalar. If an optional label is absent, a null pointer is returned.
If an error occurs in parsing, which can only occur if the label is mandatory, a valid label is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.
- SV * parse_label(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a Perl list expression. This may contain operators of precedence
down to the comma operator. The expression must be followed (and thus
terminated) either by a low-precedence logic operator such as or
or by
something that would normally terminate an expression such as semicolon.
If flags
has the PARSE_OPTIONAL
bit set, then the expression is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure that the
dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect
the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
- OP * parse_listexpr(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a sequence of zero or more Perl statements. These may be normal imperative statements, including optional labels, or declarations that have compile-time effect, or any mixture thereof. The statement sequence ends when a closing brace or end-of-file is encountered in a place where a new statement could have validly started. It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the statements.
The op tree representing the statement sequence is returned. This may
be a null pointer if the statements were all null, for example if there
were no statements or if there were only subroutine definitions (which
have compile-time side effects). If not null, it will be a lineseq
list, normally including nextstate
or equivalent ops.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
The flags
parameter is reserved for future use, and must always
be zero.
- OP * parse_stmtseq(U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Parse a Perl term expression. This may contain operators of precedence
down to the assignment operators. The expression must be followed (and thus
terminated) either by a comma or lower-precedence operator or by
something that would normally terminate an expression such as semicolon.
If flags
has the PARSE_OPTIONAL
bit set, then the expression is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure that the
dynamic parser state (PL_parser et al) is correctly set to reflect
the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.
- OP * parse_termexpr(U32 flags)
Pointer to a structure encapsulating the state of the parsing operation
currently in progress. The pointer can be locally changed to perform
a nested parse without interfering with the state of an outer parse.
Individual members of PL_parser
have their own documentation.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Direct pointer to the end of the chunk of text currently being lexed, the
end of the lexer buffer. This is equal to SvPVX(PL_parser->linestr)
+ SvCUR(PL_parser->linestr)
. A NUL
character (zero octet) is
always located at the end of the buffer, and does not count as part of
the buffer's contents.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Points to the current position of lexing inside the lexer buffer.
Characters around this point may be freely examined, within
the range delimited by SvPVX(PL_parser->linestr) and
PL_parser->bufend. The octets of the buffer may be intended to be
interpreted as either UTF-8 or Latin-1, as indicated by lex_bufutf8.
Lexing code (whether in the Perl core or not) moves this pointer past the characters that it consumes. It is also expected to perform some bookkeeping whenever a newline character is consumed. This movement can be more conveniently performed by the function lex_read_to, which handles newlines appropriately.
Interpretation of the buffer's octets can be abstracted out by using the slightly higher-level functions lex_peek_unichar and lex_read_unichar.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Points to the start of the current line inside the lexer buffer. This is useful for indicating at which column an error occurred, and not much else. This must be updated by any lexing code that consumes a newline; the function lex_read_to handles this detail.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Buffer scalar containing the chunk currently under consideration of the
text currently being lexed. This is always a plain string scalar (for
which SvPOK
is true). It is not intended to be used as a scalar by
normal scalar means; instead refer to the buffer directly by the pointer
variables described below.
The lexer maintains various char*
pointers to things in the
PL_parser->linestr
buffer. If PL_parser->linestr
is ever
reallocated, all of these pointers must be updated. Don't attempt to
do this manually, but rather use lex_grow_linestr if you need to
reallocate the buffer.
The content of the text chunk in the buffer is commonly exactly one
complete line of input, up to and including a newline terminator,
but there are situations where it is otherwise. The octets of the
buffer may be intended to be interpreted as either UTF-8 or Latin-1.
The function lex_bufutf8 tells you which. Do not use the SvUTF8
flag on this scalar, which may disagree with it.
For direct examination of the buffer, the variable PL_parser->bufend points to the end of the buffer. The current lexing position is pointed to by PL_parser->bufptr. Direct use of these pointers is usually preferable to examination of the scalar through normal scalar means.
This macro should be used as a statement. It declares a private variable (whose name begins with an underscore) that is needed by the other macros in this section. Failing to include this correctly should lead to a syntax error. For compatibility with C89 C compilers it should be placed in a block before any executable statements.
- void DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION
This is used in conjunction with one of the macros STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED and STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING
to properly restore the LC_NUMERIC
state.
A call to DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION must have been made to
declare at compile time a private variable used by this macro and the two
STORE
ones. This macro should be called as a single statement, not an
expression, but with an empty argument list, like this:
- {
- DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION;
- ...
- RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC();
- ...
- }
- void RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC()
This is used by XS code that that is LC_NUMERIC
locale-aware to force the
locale for category LC_NUMERIC
to be what perl thinks is the current
underlying locale. (The perl interpreter could be wrong about what the
underlying locale actually is if some C or XS code has called the C library
function setlocale(3) behind its back; calling sync_locale before calling
this macro will update perl's records.)
A call to DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION must have been made to declare at compile time a private variable used by this macro. This macro should be called as a single statement, not an expression, but with an empty argument list, like this:
- {
- DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION;
- ...
- STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING();
- ...
- RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC();
- ...
- }
The private variable is used to save the current locale state, so that the requisite matching call to RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC can restore it.
- void STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING()
This is used to help wrap XS or C code that that is LC_NUMERIC
locale-aware.
This locale category is generally kept set to the C locale by Perl for
backwards compatibility, and because most XS code that reads floating point
values can cope only with the decimal radix character being a dot.
This macro makes sure the current LC_NUMERIC
state is set properly, to be
aware of locale if the call to the XS or C code from the Perl program is
from within the scope of a use locale
; or to ignore locale if the call is
instead from outside such scope.
This macro is the start of wrapping the C or XS code; the wrap ending is done by calling the RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC macro after the operation. Otherwise the state can be changed that will adversely affect other XS code.
A call to DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION must have been made to declare at compile time a private variable used by this macro. This macro should be called as a single statement, not an expression, but with an empty argument list, like this:
- {
- DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION;
- ...
- STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED();
- ...
- RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC();
- ...
- }
- void STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED()
Changing the program's locale should be avoided by XS code. Nevertheless,
certain non-Perl libraries called from XS, such as Gtk
do so. When this
happens, Perl needs to be told that the locale has changed. Use this function
to do so, before returning to Perl.
- void sync_locale()
Clear something magical that the SV represents. See sv_magic.
- int mg_clear(SV* sv)
Copies the magic from one SV to another. See sv_magic.
- int mg_copy(SV *sv, SV *nsv, const char *key,
- I32 klen)
Finds the magic pointer for type
matching the SV. See sv_magic.
- MAGIC* mg_find(const SV* sv, int type)
Finds the magic pointer of type
with the given vtbl
for the SV
. See
sv_magicext.
- MAGIC* mg_findext(const SV* sv, int type,
- const MGVTBL *vtbl)
Free any magic storage used by the SV. See sv_magic.
- int mg_free(SV* sv)
Remove any magic of type how
from the SV sv
. See sv_magic.
- void mg_free_type(SV *sv, int how)
Do magic before a value is retrieved from the SV. The type of SV must
be >= SVt_PVMG
. See sv_magic.
- int mg_get(SV* sv)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Reports on the SV's length in bytes, calling length magic if available,
but does not set the UTF8 flag on sv
. It will fall back to 'get'
magic if there is no 'length' magic, but with no indication as to
whether it called 'get' magic. It assumes sv
is a PVMG
or
higher. Use sv_len()
instead.
- U32 mg_length(SV* sv)
Turns on the magical status of an SV. See sv_magic.
- void mg_magical(SV* sv)
Do magic after a value is assigned to the SV. See sv_magic.
- int mg_set(SV* sv)
Invokes mg_get
on an SV if it has 'get' magic. For example, this
will call FETCH
on a tied variable. This macro evaluates its
argument more than once.
- void SvGETMAGIC(SV* sv)
Arranges for a mutual exclusion lock to be obtained on sv
if a suitable module
has been loaded.
- void SvLOCK(SV* sv)
Invokes mg_set
on an SV if it has 'set' magic. This is necessary
after modifying a scalar, in case it is a magical variable like $|
or a tied variable (it calls STORE
). This macro evaluates its
argument more than once.
- void SvSETMAGIC(SV* sv)
Like SvSetSV
, but does any set magic required afterwards.
- void SvSetMagicSV(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
Like SvSetSV_nosteal
, but does any set magic required afterwards.
- void SvSetMagicSV_nosteal(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
Calls sv_setsv
if dsv
is not the same as ssv
. May evaluate arguments
more than once. Does not handle 'set' magic on the destination SV.
- void SvSetSV(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
Calls a non-destructive version of sv_setsv
if dsv
is not the same as
ssv
. May evaluate arguments more than once.
- void SvSetSV_nosteal(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
Arranges for sv
to be shared between threads if a suitable module
has been loaded.
- void SvSHARE(SV* sv)
Releases a mutual exclusion lock on sv
if a suitable module
has been loaded.
- void SvUNLOCK(SV* sv)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C memcpy
function. The src
is the
source, dest
is the destination, nitems
is the number of items, and
type
is the type. May fail on overlapping copies. See also Move.
- void Copy(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
Like Copy
but returns dest
. Useful
for encouraging compilers to tail-call
optimise.
- void * CopyD(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C memmove
function. The src
is the
source, dest
is the destination, nitems
is the number of items, and
type
is the type. Can do overlapping moves. See also Copy.
- void Move(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
Like Move
but returns dest
. Useful
for encouraging compilers to tail-call
optimise.
- void * MoveD(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C malloc
function.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with Safefree.
In 5.9.3, Newx() and friends replace the older New() API, and drops the first parameter, x, a debug aid which allowed callers to identify themselves. This aid has been superseded by a new build option, PERL_MEM_LOG (see PERL_MEM_LOG in perlhacktips). The older API is still there for use in XS modules supporting older perls.
- void Newx(void* ptr, int nitems, type)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C malloc
function, with
cast. See also Newx.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with Safefree.
- void Newxc(void* ptr, int nitems, type, cast)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C malloc
function. The allocated
memory is zeroed with memzero
. See also Newx.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with Safefree.
- void Newxz(void* ptr, int nitems, type)
PoisonWith(0xEF) for catching access to freed memory.
- void Poison(void* dest, int nitems, type)
PoisonWith(0xEF) for catching access to freed memory.
- void PoisonFree(void* dest, int nitems, type)
PoisonWith(0xAB) for catching access to allocated but uninitialized memory.
- void PoisonNew(void* dest, int nitems, type)
Fill up memory with a byte pattern (a byte repeated over and over again) that hopefully catches attempts to access uninitialized memory.
- void PoisonWith(void* dest, int nitems, type,
- U8 byte)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C realloc
function.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with Safefree.
- void Renew(void* ptr, int nitems, type)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C realloc
function, with
cast.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with Safefree.
- void Renewc(void* ptr, int nitems, type, cast)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C free
function.
This should ONLY be used on memory obtained using Newx and friends.
- void Safefree(void* ptr)
Perl's version of strdup()
. Returns a pointer to a newly allocated
string which is a duplicate of pv
. The size of the string is
determined by strlen()
, which means it may not contain embedded NUL
characters and must have a trailing NUL
. The memory allocated for the new
string can be freed with the Safefree()
function.
On some platforms, Windows for example, all allocated memory owned by a thread
is deallocated when that thread ends. So if you need that not to happen, you
need to use the shared memory functions, such as savesharedpv.
- char* savepv(const char* pv)
Perl's version of what strndup()
would be if it existed. Returns a
pointer to a newly allocated string which is a duplicate of the first
len
bytes from pv
, plus a trailing
NUL
byte. The memory allocated for
the new string can be freed with the Safefree()
function.
On some platforms, Windows for example, all allocated memory owned by a thread
is deallocated when that thread ends. So if you need that not to happen, you
need to use the shared memory functions, such as savesharedpvn.
- char* savepvn(const char* pv, I32 len)
Like savepvn
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- char* savepvs(const char* s)
A version of savepv()
which allocates the duplicate string in memory
which is shared between threads.
- char* savesharedpv(const char* pv)
A version of savepvn()
which allocates the duplicate string in memory
which is shared between threads. (With the specific difference that a NULL
pointer is not acceptable)
- char* savesharedpvn(const char *const pv,
- const STRLEN len)
A version of savepvs()
which allocates the duplicate string in memory
which is shared between threads.
- char* savesharedpvs(const char* s)
A version of savesharedpv()
which allocates the duplicate string in
memory which is shared between threads.
- char* savesharedsvpv(SV *sv)
A version of savepv()
/savepvn()
which gets the string to duplicate from
the passed in SV using SvPV()
On some platforms, Windows for example, all allocated memory owned by a thread
is deallocated when that thread ends. So if you need that not to happen, you
need to use the shared memory functions, such as savesharedsvpv.
- char* savesvpv(SV* sv)
This is an architecture-independent macro to copy one structure to another.
- void StructCopy(type *src, type *dest, type)
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C memzero
function. The dest
is the
destination, nitems
is the number of items, and type
is the type.
- void Zero(void* dest, int nitems, type)
Like Zero
but returns dest. Useful
for encouraging compilers to tail-call
optimise.
- void * ZeroD(void* dest, int nitems, type)
Dumps the C backtrace to the given fp
.
Returns true if a backtrace could be retrieved, false if not.
Analyses the string in order to make fast searches on it using fbm_instr()
-- the Boyer-Moore algorithm.
- void fbm_compile(SV* sv, U32 flags)
Returns the location of the SV in the string delimited by big
and
bigend
(bigend
) is the char following the last char).
It returns NULL
if the string can't be found. The sv
does not have to be fbm_compiled
, but the search will not be as fast
then.
- char* fbm_instr(unsigned char* big,
- unsigned char* bigend, SV* littlestr,
- U32 flags)
Returns true if the leading len
bytes of the strings s1
and s2
are the
same
case-insensitively; false otherwise. Uppercase and lowercase ASCII range bytes
match themselves and their opposite case counterparts. Non-cased and non-ASCII
range bytes match only themselves.
- I32 foldEQ(const char* a, const char* b, I32 len)
Returns true if the leading len
bytes of the strings s1
and s2
are the
same case-insensitively in the current locale; false otherwise.
- I32 foldEQ_locale(const char* a, const char* b,
- I32 len)
Takes a sprintf-style format pattern and conventional (non-SV) arguments and returns the formatted string.
- (char *) Perl_form(pTHX_ const char* pat, ...)
can be used any place a string (char *) is required:
- char * s = Perl_form("%d.%d",major,minor);
Uses a single private buffer so if you want to format several strings you must explicitly copy the earlier strings away (and free the copies when you are done).
- char* form(const char* pat, ...)
Fill sv
with current working directory
- int getcwd_sv(SV* sv)
Returns a SV containing a dump of depth
frames of the call stack, skipping
the skip
innermost ones. depth
of 20 is usually enough.
The appended output looks like:
... 1 10e004812:0082 Perl_croak util.c:1716 /usr/bin/perl 2 10df8d6d2:1d72 perl_parse perl.c:3975 /usr/bin/perl ...
The fields are tab-separated. The first column is the depth (zero
being the innermost non-skipped frame). In the hex:offset, the hex is
where the program counter was in S_parse_body
, and the :offset (might
be missing) tells how much inside the S_parse_body
the program counter was.
The util.c:1716
is the source code file and line number.
The /usr/bin/perl is obvious (hopefully).
Unknowns are "-"
. Unknowns can happen unfortunately quite easily:
if the platform doesn't support retrieving the information;
if the binary is missing the debug information;
if the optimizer has transformed the code by for example inlining.
This is a synonym for (! foldEQ())
- I32 ibcmp(const char* a, const char* b, I32 len)
This is a synonym for (! foldEQ_locale())
- I32 ibcmp_locale(const char* a, const char* b,
- I32 len)
Test that the given pv
doesn't contain any internal NUL
characters.
If it does, set errno
to ENOENT
, optionally warn, and return FALSE.
Return TRUE if the name is safe.
Used by the IS_SAFE_SYSCALL()
macro.
- bool is_safe_syscall(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
- const char *what,
- const char *op_name)
Test two buffers (which may contain embedded NUL
characters, to see if they
are equal. The len
parameter indicates the number of bytes to compare.
Returns zero if equal, or non-zero if non-equal.
- bool memEQ(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
Test two buffers (which may contain embedded NUL
characters, to see if they
are not equal. The len
parameter indicates the number of bytes to compare.
Returns zero if non-equal, or non-zero if equal.
- bool memNE(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list. These are used to generate a string message. If the message does not end with a newline, then it will be extended with some indication of the current location in the code, as described for mess_sv.
Normally, the resulting message is returned in a new mortal SV. During global destruction a single SV may be shared between uses of this function.
- SV * mess(const char *pat, ...)
Expands a message, intended for the user, to include an indication of the current location in the code, if the message does not already appear to be complete.
basemsg
is the initial message or object. If it is a reference, it
will be used as-is and will be the result of this function. Otherwise it
is used as a string, and if it already ends with a newline, it is taken
to be complete, and the result of this function will be the same string.
If the message does not end with a newline, then a segment such as at
foo.pl line 37
will be appended, and possibly other clauses indicating
the current state of execution. The resulting message will end with a
dot and a newline.
Normally, the resulting message is returned in a new mortal SV.
During global destruction a single SV may be shared between uses of this
function. If consume
is true, then the function is permitted (but not
required) to modify and return basemsg
instead of allocating a new SV.
- SV * mess_sv(SV *basemsg, bool consume)
The C library snprintf
functionality, if available and
standards-compliant (uses vsnprintf
, actually). However, if the
vsnprintf
is not available, will unfortunately use the unsafe
vsprintf
which can overrun the buffer (there is an overrun check,
but that may be too late). Consider using sv_vcatpvf
instead, or
getting vsnprintf
.
- int my_snprintf(char *buffer, const Size_t len,
- const char *format, ...)
The C library sprintf, wrapped if necessary, to ensure that it will return
the length of the string written to the buffer. Only rare pre-ANSI systems
need the wrapper function - usually this is a direct call to sprintf.
- int my_sprintf(char *buffer, const char *pat, ...)
The C library strlcat
if available, or a Perl implementation of it.
This operates on C NUL
-terminated strings.
my_strlcat()
appends string src
to the end of dst
. It will append at
most size - strlen(dst) - 1
characters. It will then NUL
-terminate,
unless size
is 0 or the original dst
string was longer than size
(in
practice this should not happen as it means that either size
is incorrect or
that dst
is not a proper NUL
-terminated string).
Note that size
is the full size of the destination buffer and
the result is guaranteed to be NUL
-terminated if there is room. Note that
room for the NUL
should be included in size
.
The return value is the total length that dst
would have if size
is
sufficiently large. Thus it is the initial length of dst
plus the length of
src
. If size
is smaller than the return, the excess was not appended.
- Size_t my_strlcat(char *dst, const char *src,
- Size_t size)
The C library strlcpy
if available, or a Perl implementation of it.
This operates on C NUL
-terminated strings.
my_strlcpy()
copies up to size - 1
characters from the string src
to dst
, NUL
-terminating the result if size
is not 0.
The return value is the total length src
would be if the copy completely
succeeded. If it is larger than size
, the excess was not copied.
- Size_t my_strlcpy(char *dst, const char *src,
- Size_t size)
The C library vsnprintf
if available and standards-compliant.
However, if if the vsnprintf
is not available, will unfortunately
use the unsafe vsprintf
which can overrun the buffer (there is an
overrun check, but that may be too late). Consider using
sv_vcatpvf
instead, or getting vsnprintf
.
- int my_vsnprintf(char *buffer, const Size_t len,
- const char *format, va_list ap)
Find the first (leftmost) occurrence of a sequence of bytes within another
sequence. This is the Perl version of strstr()
, extended to handle
arbitrary sequences, potentially containing embedded NUL
characters (NUL
is what the initial n
in the function name stands for; some systems have an
equivalent, memmem()
, but with a somewhat different API).
Another way of thinking about this function is finding a needle in a haystack.
big
points to the first byte in the haystack. big_end
points to one byte
beyond the final byte in the haystack. little
points to the first byte in
the needle. little_end
points to one byte beyond the final byte in the
needle. All the parameters must be non-NULL
.
The function returns NULL
if there is no occurrence of little
within
big
. If little
is the empty string, big
is returned.
Because this function operates at the byte level, and because of the inherent characteristics of UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC), it will work properly if both the needle and the haystack are strings with the same UTF-8ness, but not if the UTF-8ness differs.
- char * ninstr(char * big, char * bigend, char * little,
- char * little_end)
Provides system-specific tune up of the C runtime environment necessary to run Perl interpreters. This should be called only once, before creating any Perl interpreters.
- void PERL_SYS_INIT(int *argc, char*** argv)
Provides system-specific tune up of the C runtime environment necessary to run Perl interpreters. This should be called only once, before creating any Perl interpreters.
- void PERL_SYS_INIT3(int *argc, char*** argv,
- char*** env)
Provides system-specific clean up of the C runtime environment after running Perl interpreters. This should be called only once, after freeing any remaining Perl interpreters.
- void PERL_SYS_TERM()
quadmath_format_needed()
returns true if the format string seems to
contain at least one non-Q-prefixed %[efgaEFGA]
format specifier,
or returns false otherwise.
The format specifier detection is not complete printf-syntax detection, but it should catch most common cases.
If true is returned, those arguments should in theory be processed
with quadmath_snprintf()
, but in case there is more than one such
format specifier (see quadmath_format_single), and if there is
anything else beyond that one (even just a single byte), they
cannot be processed because quadmath_snprintf()
is very strict,
accepting only one format spec, and nothing else.
In this case, the code should probably fail.
- bool quadmath_format_needed(const char* format)
quadmath_snprintf()
is very strict about its format string and will
fail, returning -1, if the format is invalid. It accepts exactly
one format spec.
quadmath_format_single()
checks that the intended single spec looks
sane: begins with %
, has only one %
, ends with [efgaEFGA]
,
and has Q
before it. This is not a full "printf syntax check",
just the basics.
Returns the format if it is valid, NULL if not.
quadmath_format_single()
can and will actually patch in the missing
Q
, if necessary. In this case it will return the modified copy of
the format, which the caller will need to free.
See also quadmath_format_needed.
- const char* quadmath_format_single(const char* format)
Returns the value of an ASCII-range hex digit and advances the string pointer. Behaviour is only well defined when isXDIGIT(*str) is true.
- U8 READ_XDIGIT(char str*)
Like ninstr, but instead finds the final (rightmost) occurrence of a
sequence of bytes within another sequence, returning NULL
if there is no
such occurrence.
- char * rninstr(char * big, char * bigend,
- char * little, char * little_end)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if they are equal. Returns true or
false.
- bool strEQ(char* s1, char* s2)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if the first, s1
, is greater than
or equal to the second, s2
. Returns true or false.
- bool strGE(char* s1, char* s2)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if the first, s1
, is greater than
the second, s2
. Returns true or false.
- bool strGT(char* s1, char* s2)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if the first, s1
, is less than or
equal to the second, s2
. Returns true or false.
- bool strLE(char* s1, char* s2)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if the first, s1
, is less than the
second, s2
. Returns true or false.
- bool strLT(char* s1, char* s2)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if they are different. Returns true
or false.
- bool strNE(char* s1, char* s2)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if they are equal. The len
parameter indicates the number of bytes to compare. Returns true or false. (A
wrapper for strncmp
).
- bool strnEQ(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
Test two NUL
-terminated strings to see if they are different. The len
parameter indicates the number of bytes to compare. Returns true or false. (A
wrapper for strncmp
).
- bool strnNE(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
Dummy routine which reports that object can be destroyed when there is no
sharing module present. It ignores its single SV argument, and returns
'true'. Exists to avoid test for a NULL
function pointer and because it
could potentially warn under some level of strict-ness.
- bool sv_destroyable(SV *sv)
Dummy routine which "shares" an SV when there is no sharing module present.
Or "locks" it. Or "unlocks" it. In other
words, ignores its single SV argument.
Exists to avoid test for a NULL
function pointer and because it could
potentially warn under some level of strict-ness.
- void sv_nosharing(SV *sv)
pat
and args
are a sprintf-style format pattern and encapsulated
argument list, respectively. These are used to generate a string message. If
the
message does not end with a newline, then it will be extended with
some indication of the current location in the code, as described for
mess_sv.
Normally, the resulting message is returned in a new mortal SV. During global destruction a single SV may be shared between uses of this function.
- SV * vmess(const char *pat, va_list *args)
These functions are related to the method resolution order of perl classes
Returns the mro linearisation for the given stash. By default, this
will be whatever mro_get_linear_isa_dfs
returns unless some
other MRO is in effect for the stash. The return value is a
read-only AV*.
You are responsible for SvREFCNT_inc()
on the
return value if you plan to store it anywhere
semi-permanently (otherwise it might be deleted
out from under you the next time the cache is
invalidated).
- AV* mro_get_linear_isa(HV* stash)
Invalidates method caching on any child classes of the given stash, so that they might notice the changes in this one.
Ideally, all instances of PL_sub_generation++
in
perl source outside of mro.c should be
replaced by calls to this.
Perl automatically handles most of the common ways a method might be redefined. However, there are a few ways you could change a method in a stash without the cache code noticing, in which case you need to call this method afterwards:
1) Directly manipulating the stash HV entries from XS code.
2) Assigning a reference to a readonly scalar constant into a stash entry in order to create a constant subroutine (like constant.pm does).
This same method is available from pure perl
via, mro::method_changed_in(classname)
.
- void mro_method_changed_in(HV* stash)
Registers a custom mro plugin. See perlmroapi for details.
- void mro_register(const struct mro_alg *mro)
Declare local variables for a multicall. See LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS in perlcall.
- dMULTICALL;
Make a lightweight callback. See LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS in perlcall.
- MULTICALL;
Closing bracket for a lightweight callback. See LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS in perlcall.
- POP_MULTICALL;
Opening bracket for a lightweight callback. See LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS in perlcall.
- PUSH_MULTICALL;
converts a string representing a binary number to numeric form.
On entry start
and *len
give the string to scan, *flags
gives
conversion flags, and result
should be NULL
or a pointer to an NV.
The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first invalid character.
Unless PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT
is set in *flags
, encountering an
invalid character will also trigger a warning.
On return *len
is set to the length of the scanned string,
and *flags
gives output flags.
If the value is <= UV_MAX
it is returned as a UV, the output flags are clear,
and nothing is written to *result
. If the value is > UV_MAX
, grok_bin
returns UV_MAX
, sets PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX
in the output flags,
and writes the value to *result
(or the value is discarded if result
is NULL).
The binary number may optionally be prefixed with "0b"
or "b"
unless
PERL_SCAN_DISALLOW_PREFIX
is set in *flags
on entry. If
PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES
is set in *flags
then the binary
number may use "_"
characters to separate digits.
- UV grok_bin(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
- I32* flags, NV *result)
converts a string representing a hex number to numeric form.
On entry start
and *len_p
give the string to scan, *flags
gives
conversion flags, and result
should be NULL
or a pointer to an NV.
The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first invalid character.
Unless PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT
is set in *flags
, encountering an
invalid character will also trigger a warning.
On return *len
is set to the length of the scanned string,
and *flags
gives output flags.
If the value is <= UV_MAX
it is returned as a UV, the output flags are clear,
and nothing is written to *result
. If the value is > UV_MAX
, grok_hex
returns UV_MAX
, sets PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX
in the output flags,
and writes the value to *result
(or the value is discarded if result
is NULL
).
The hex number may optionally be prefixed with "0x"
or "x"
unless
PERL_SCAN_DISALLOW_PREFIX
is set in *flags
on entry. If
PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES
is set in *flags
then the hex
number may use "_"
characters to separate digits.
- UV grok_hex(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
- I32* flags, NV *result)
Helper for grok_number()
, accepts various ways of spelling "infinity"
or "not a number", and returns one of the following flag combinations:
- IS_NUMBER_INFINITE
- IS_NUMBER_NAN
- IS_NUMBER_INFINITE | IS_NUMBER_NEG
- IS_NUMBER_NAN | IS_NUMBER_NEG
- 0
possibly |-ed with IS_NUMBER_TRAILING
.
If an infinity or a not-a-number is recognized, *sp
will point to
one byte past the end of the recognized string. If the recognition fails,
zero is returned, and *sp
will not move.
Identical to grok_number_flags()
with flags
set to zero.
- int grok_number(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
- UV *valuep)
Recognise (or not) a number. The type of the number is returned
(0 if unrecognised), otherwise it is a bit-ORed combination of
IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
, IS_NUMBER_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX
, IS_NUMBER_NOT_INT
,
IS_NUMBER_NEG
, IS_NUMBER_INFINITY
, IS_NUMBER_NAN
(defined in perl.h).
If the value of the number can fit in a UV, it is returned in *valuep
.
IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
will be set to indicate that *valuep
is valid, IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
will never be set unless *valuep
is valid, but *valuep
may have been assigned
to during processing even though IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
is not set on return.
If valuep
is NULL
, IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
will be set for the same cases as when
valuep
is non-NULL
, but no actual assignment (or SEGV) will occur.
IS_NUMBER_NOT_INT
will be set with IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
if trailing decimals were
seen (in which case *valuep
gives the true value truncated to an integer), and
IS_NUMBER_NEG
if the number is negative (in which case *valuep
holds the
absolute value). IS_NUMBER_IN_UV
is not set if e notation was used or the
number is larger than a UV.
flags
allows only PERL_SCAN_TRAILING
, which allows for trailing
non-numeric text on an otherwise successful grok, setting
IS_NUMBER_TRAILING
on the result.
- int grok_number_flags(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
- UV *valuep, U32 flags)
Scan and skip for a numeric decimal separator (radix).
- bool grok_numeric_radix(const char **sp,
- const char *send)
converts a string representing an octal number to numeric form.
On entry start
and *len
give the string to scan, *flags
gives
conversion flags, and result
should be NULL
or a pointer to an NV.
The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first invalid character.
Unless PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT
is set in *flags
, encountering an
8 or 9 will also trigger a warning.
On return *len
is set to the length of the scanned string,
and *flags
gives output flags.
If the value is <= UV_MAX
it is returned as a UV, the output flags are clear,
and nothing is written to *result
. If the value is > UV_MAX
, grok_oct
returns UV_MAX
, sets PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX
in the output flags,
and writes the value to *result
(or the value is discarded if result
is NULL
).
If PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES
is set in *flags
then the octal
number may use "_"
characters to separate digits.
- UV grok_oct(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
- I32* flags, NV *result)
Perl_isinfnan()
is utility function that returns true if the NV
argument is either an infinity or a NaN
, false otherwise. To test
in more detail, use Perl_isinf()
and Perl_isnan()
.
This is also the logical inverse of Perl_isfinite().
- bool isinfnan(NV nv)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Return a non-zero integer if the sign bit on an NV is set, and 0 if it is not.
If Configure detects this system has a signbit()
that will work with
our NVs, then we just use it via the #define
in perl.h. Otherwise,
fall back on this implementation. The main use of this function
is catching -0.0
.
Configure
notes: This function is called 'Perl_signbit'
instead of a
plain 'signbit'
because it is easy to imagine a system having a signbit()
function or macro that doesn't happen to work with our particular choice
of NVs. We shouldn't just re-#define
signbit
as Perl_signbit
and expect
the standard system headers to be happy. Also, this is a no-context
function (no pTHX_
) because Perl_signbit()
is usually re-#defined
in
perl.h as a simple macro call to the system's signbit()
.
Users should just always call Perl_signbit()
.
- int Perl_signbit(NV f)
For backwards compatibility. Use grok_bin
instead.
- NV scan_bin(const char* start, STRLEN len,
- STRLEN* retlen)
For backwards compatibility. Use grok_hex
instead.
- NV scan_hex(const char* start, STRLEN len,
- STRLEN* retlen)
For backwards compatibility. Use grok_oct
instead.
- NV scan_oct(const char* start, STRLEN len,
- STRLEN* retlen)
Some of these are also deprecated. You can exclude these from
your compiled Perl by adding this option to Configure:
-Accflags='-DNO_MATHOMS'
Return the description of a given custom op. This was once used by the
OP_DESC
macro, but is no longer: it has only been kept for
compatibility, and should not be used.
- const char * custom_op_desc(const OP *o)
Return the name for a given custom op. This was once used by the OP_NAME
macro, but is no longer: it has only been kept for compatibility, and
should not be used.
- const char * custom_op_name(const OP *o)
- GV* gv_fetchmethod(HV* stash, const char* name)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Tests if some arbitrary number of bytes begins in a valid UTF-8 character. Note that an INVARIANT (i.e. ASCII on non-EBCDIC machines) character is a valid UTF-8 character. The actual number of bytes in the UTF-8 character will be returned if it is valid, otherwise 0.
This function is deprecated due to the possibility that malformed input could cause reading beyond the end of the input buffer. Use isUTF8_CHAR instead.
- STRLEN is_utf8_char(const U8 *s)
This is identical to the macro isUTF8_CHAR.
- STRLEN is_utf8_char_buf(const U8 *buf,
- const U8 *buf_end)
The engine implementing pack() Perl function. Note: parameters
next_in_list
and flags
are not used. This call should not be used; use
packlist
instead.
- void pack_cat(SV *cat, const char *pat,
- const char *patend, SV **beglist,
- SV **endlist, SV ***next_in_list,
- U32 flags)
Looks up the type of the lexical variable at position po
in the
currently-compiling pad. If the variable is typed, the stash of the
class to which it is typed is returned. If not, NULL
is returned.
- HV * pad_compname_type(PADOFFSET po)
Return a pointer to the byte-encoded representation of the SV. May cause the SV to be downgraded from UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the SvPVbyte_nolen
macro.
- char* sv_2pvbyte_nolen(SV* sv)
Return a pointer to the UTF-8-encoded representation of the SV. May cause the SV to be upgraded to UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the SvPVutf8_nolen
macro.
- char* sv_2pvutf8_nolen(SV* sv)
Like sv_2pv()
, but doesn't return the length too. You should usually
use the macro wrapper SvPV_nolen(sv)
instead.
- char* sv_2pv_nolen(SV* sv)
Like sv_catpvn
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_catpvn_mg(SV *sv, const char *ptr,
- STRLEN len)
Like sv_catsv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_catsv_mg(SV *dsv, SV *ssv)
Undo various types of fakery on an SV: if the PV is a shared string, make
a private copy; if we're a ref, stop refing; if we're a glob, downgrade to
an xpvmg
. See also sv_force_normal_flags.
- void sv_force_normal(SV *sv)
A private implementation of the SvIVx
macro for compilers which can't
cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.
- IV sv_iv(SV* sv)
Dummy routine which "locks" an SV when there is no locking module present.
Exists to avoid test for a NULL
function pointer and because it could
potentially warn under some level of strict-ness.
"Superseded" by sv_nosharing()
.
- void sv_nolocking(SV *sv)
Dummy routine which "unlocks" an SV when there is no locking module present.
Exists to avoid test for a NULL
function pointer and because it could
potentially warn under some level of strict-ness.
"Superseded" by sv_nosharing()
.
- void sv_nounlocking(SV *sv)
A private implementation of the SvNVx
macro for compilers which can't
cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.
- NV sv_nv(SV* sv)
Use the SvPV_nolen
macro instead
- char* sv_pv(SV *sv)
Use SvPVbyte_nolen
instead.
- char* sv_pvbyte(SV *sv)
A private implementation of the SvPVbyte
macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro
instead.
- char* sv_pvbyten(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)
A private implementation of the SvPV
macro for compilers which can't
cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.
- char* sv_pvn(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)
Use the SvPVutf8_nolen
macro instead
- char* sv_pvutf8(SV *sv)
A private implementation of the SvPVutf8
macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro
instead.
- char* sv_pvutf8n(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)
Taint an SV. Use SvTAINTED_on
instead.
- void sv_taint(SV* sv)
Unsets the RV status of the SV, and decrements the reference count of
whatever was being referenced by the RV. This can almost be thought of
as a reversal of newSVrv
. This is sv_unref_flags
with the flag
being zero. See SvROK_off.
- void sv_unref(SV* sv)
Tells an SV to use ptr
to find its string value. Implemented by
calling sv_usepvn_flags
with flags
of 0, hence does not handle 'set'
magic. See sv_usepvn_flags.
- void sv_usepvn(SV* sv, char* ptr, STRLEN len)
Like sv_usepvn
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_usepvn_mg(SV *sv, char *ptr, STRLEN len)
A private implementation of the SvUVx
macro for compilers which can't
cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.
- UV sv_uv(SV* sv)
The engine implementing unpack() Perl function. Note: parameters strbeg
,
new_s
and ocnt
are not used. This call should not be used, use
unpackstring
instead.
- I32 unpack_str(const char *pat, const char *patend,
- const char *s, const char *strbeg,
- const char *strend, char **new_s,
- I32 ocnt, U32 flags)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Returns the native code point of the first character in the string s
which is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; retlen
will be set to the
length, in bytes, of that character.
Some, but not all, UTF-8 malformations are detected, and in fact, some malformed input could cause reading beyond the end of the input buffer, which is why this function is deprecated. Use utf8_to_uvchr_buf instead.
If s points to one of the detected malformations, and UTF8 warnings are
enabled, zero is returned and *retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't
NULL
) to -1. If those warnings are off, the computed value if well-defined (or
the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, if not) is silently returned, and *retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't NULL) so that (s + *retlen
) is the
next possible position in s that could begin a non-malformed character.
See utf8n_to_uvchr for details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
- UV utf8_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Returns the Unicode code point of the first character in the string s
which is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; retlen
will be set to the
length, in bytes, of that character.
Some, but not all, UTF-8 malformations are detected, and in fact, some malformed input could cause reading beyond the end of the input buffer, which is one reason why this function is deprecated. The other is that only in extremely limited circumstances should the Unicode versus native code point be of any interest to you. See utf8_to_uvuni_buf for alternatives.
If s points to one of the detected malformations, and UTF8 warnings are
enabled, zero is returned and *retlen
is set (if retlen
doesn't point to
NULL) to -1. If those warnings are off, the computed value if well-defined (or
the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, if not) is silently returned, and *retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't NULL) so that (s + *retlen
) is the
next possible position in s that could begin a non-malformed character.
See utf8n_to_uvchr for details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
- UV utf8_to_uvuni(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)
Constructs, checks, and returns an assignment op. left
and right
supply the parameters of the assignment; they are consumed by this
function and become part of the constructed op tree.
If optype
is OP_ANDASSIGN
, OP_ORASSIGN
, or OP_DORASSIGN
, then
a suitable conditional optree is constructed. If optype
is the opcode
of a binary operator, such as OP_BIT_OR
, then an op is constructed that
performs the binary operation and assigns the result to the left argument.
Either way, if optype
is non-zero then flags
has no effect.
If optype
is zero, then a plain scalar or list assignment is
constructed. Which type of assignment it is is automatically determined.
flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except that OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits
of op_private
, except that the bit with value 1 or 2 is automatically
set as required.
- OP * newASSIGNOP(I32 flags, OP *left, I32 optype,
- OP *right)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any binary type. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except
that OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight bits,
the eight bits of op_private
, except that the bit with value 1 or
2 is automatically set as required. first
and last supply up to
two ops to be the direct children of the binary op; they are consumed
by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
- OP * newBINOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
- OP *last)
Constructs, checks, and returns a conditional-expression (cond_expr
)
op. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except that OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
op_private
, except that the bit with value 1 is automatically set.
first
supplies the expression selecting between the two branches,
and trueop
and falseop
supply the branches; they are consumed by
this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
- OP * newCONDOP(I32 flags, OP *first, OP *trueop,
- OP *falseop)
Constructs and returns an op to access $_
.
- OP * newDEFSVOP()
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a foreach
loop (iteration through a list of values). This is a heavyweight loop,
with structure that allows exiting the loop by last and suchlike.
sv
optionally supplies the variable that will be aliased to each
item in turn; if null, it defaults to $_
.
expr
supplies the list of values to iterate over. block
supplies
the main body of the loop, and cont
optionally supplies a continue
block that operates as a second half of the body. All of these optree
inputs are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed
op tree.
flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
for the leaveloop
op and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of op_private
for
the leaveloop
op, except that (in both cases) some bits will be set
automatically.
- OP * newFOROP(I32 flags, OP *sv, OP *expr, OP *block,
- OP *cont)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a given
block.
cond
supplies the expression that will be locally assigned to a lexical
variable, and block
supplies the body of the given
construct; they
are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
defsv_off
must be zero (it used to identity the pad slot of lexical $_).
- OP * newGIVENOP(OP *cond, OP *block,
- PADOFFSET defsv_off)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves an
embedded reference to a GV. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the
eight bits of op_flags
. gv
identifies the GV that the op should
reference; calling this function does not transfer ownership of any
reference to it.
- OP * newGVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, GV *gv)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any list type. type
is
the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except that
OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically if required. first
and last
supply up to two ops to be direct children of the list op; they are
consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
For most list operators, the check function expects all the kid ops to be
present already, so calling newLISTOP(OP_JOIN, ...)
(e.g.) is not
appropriate. What you want to do in that case is create an op of type
OP_LIST
, append more children to it, and then call op_convert_list.
See op_convert_list for more information.
- OP * newLISTOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
- OP *last)
Constructs, checks, and returns a logical (flow control) op. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except
that OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight bits,
the eight bits of op_private
, except that the bit with value 1 is
automatically set. first
supplies the expression controlling the
flow, and other
supplies the side (alternate) chain of ops; they are
consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
- OP * newLOGOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
- OP *other)
Constructs, checks, and returns a loop-exiting op (such as goto
or last). type
is the opcode. label
supplies the parameter
determining the target of the op; it is consumed by this function and
becomes part of the constructed op tree.
- OP * newLOOPEX(I32 type, OP *label)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a loop. This is
only a loop in the control flow through the op tree; it does not have
the heavyweight loop structure that allows exiting the loop by last
and suchlike. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
for the
top-level op, except that some bits will be set automatically as required.
expr
supplies the expression controlling loop iteration, and block
supplies the body of the loop; they are consumed by this function and
become part of the constructed op tree. debuggable
is currently
unused and should always be 1.
- OP * newLOOPOP(I32 flags, I32 debuggable, OP *expr,
- OP *block)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of method type with a method name
evaluated at runtime. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the eight
bits of op_flags
, except that OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically,
and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of op_private
, except that
the bit with value 1 is automatically set. dynamic_meth
supplies an
op which evaluates method name; it is consumed by this function and
become part of the constructed op tree.
Supported optypes: OP_METHOD
.
- OP * newMETHOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of method type with a constant
method name. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits of
op_flags
, and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
op_private
. const_meth
supplies a constant method name;
it must be a shared COW string.
Supported optypes: OP_METHOD_NAMED
.
- OP * newMETHOP_named(I32 type, I32 flags,
- SV *const_meth)
Constructs, checks, and returns a new stub
op, which represents an
empty list expression.
- OP * newNULLLIST()
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any base type (any type that
has no extra fields). type
is the opcode. flags
gives the
eight bits of op_flags
, and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits
of op_private
.
- OP * newOP(I32 type, I32 flags)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves a
reference to a pad element. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the
eight bits of op_flags
. A pad slot is automatically allocated, and
is populated with sv
; this function takes ownership of one reference
to it.
This function only exists if Perl has been compiled to use ithreads.
- OP * newPADOP(I32 type, I32 flags, SV *sv)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any pattern matching type.
type
is the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of op_private
.
- OP * newPMOP(I32 type, I32 flags)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves an
embedded C-level pointer (PV). type
is the opcode. flags
gives
the eight bits of op_flags
. pv
supplies the C-level pointer, which
must have been allocated using PerlMemShared_malloc
; the memory will
be freed when the op is destroyed.
- OP * newPVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, char *pv)
Constructs and returns a range
op, with subordinate flip
and
flop
ops. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
for the
flip
op and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of op_private
for both the flip
and range
ops, except that the bit with value
1 is automatically set. left
and right
supply the expressions
controlling the endpoints of the range; they are consumed by this function
and become part of the constructed op tree.
- OP * newRANGE(I32 flags, OP *left, OP *right)
Constructs, checks, and returns an lslice
(list slice) op. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except that OPf_KIDS
will
be set automatically, and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
op_private
, except that the bit with value 1 or 2 is automatically
set as required. listval
and subscript
supply the parameters of
the slice; they are consumed by this function and become part of the
constructed op tree.
- OP * newSLICEOP(I32 flags, OP *subscript,
- OP *listval)
Constructs a state op (COP). The state op is normally a nextstate
op,
but will be a dbstate
op if debugging is enabled for currently-compiled
code. The state op is populated from PL_curcop
(or PL_compiling
).
If label
is non-null, it supplies the name of a label to attach to
the state op; this function takes ownership of the memory pointed at by
label
, and will free it. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
for the state op.
If o
is null, the state op is returned. Otherwise the state op is
combined with o
into a lineseq
list op, which is returned. o
is consumed by this function and becomes part of the returned op tree.
- OP * newSTATEOP(I32 flags, char *label, OP *o)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves an
embedded SV. type
is the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits
of op_flags
. sv
gives the SV to embed in the op; this function
takes ownership of one reference to it.
- OP * newSVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, SV *sv)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any unary type. type
is
the opcode. flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
, except that
OPf_KIDS
will be set automatically if required, and, shifted up eight
bits, the eight bits of op_private
, except that the bit with value 1
is automatically set. first
supplies an optional op to be the direct
child of the unary op; it is consumed by this function and become part
of the constructed op tree.
- OP * newUNOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first)
Similar to newUNOP
, but creates an UNOP_AUX
struct instead, with op_aux
initialised to aux
- OP* newUNOP_AUX(I32 type, I32 flags, OP* first,
- UNOP_AUX_item *aux)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a when
block.
cond
supplies the test expression, and block
supplies the block
that will be executed if the test evaluates to true; they are consumed
by this function and become part of the constructed op tree. cond
will be interpreted DWIMically, often as a comparison against $_
,
and may be null to generate a default
block.
- OP * newWHENOP(OP *cond, OP *block)
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a while
loop.
This is a heavyweight loop, with structure that allows exiting the loop
by last and suchlike.
loop
is an optional preconstructed enterloop
op to use in the
loop; if it is null then a suitable op will be constructed automatically.
expr
supplies the loop's controlling expression. block
supplies the
main body of the loop, and cont
optionally supplies a continue block
that operates as a second half of the body. All of these optree inputs
are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
flags
gives the eight bits of op_flags
for the leaveloop
op and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of op_private
for
the leaveloop
op, except that (in both cases) some bits will be set
automatically. debuggable
is currently unused and should always be 1.
has_my
can be supplied as true to force the
loop body to be enclosed in its own scope.
- OP * newWHILEOP(I32 flags, I32 debuggable,
- LOOP *loop, OP *expr, OP *block,
- OP *cont, I32 has_my)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Available only under threaded builds, this function allocates an entry in
PL_stashpad
for the stash passed to it.
- PADOFFSET alloccopstash(HV *hv)
Handles compile-time scope exit. floor
is the savestack index returned by
block_start
, and seq
is the body of the block. Returns the block,
possibly modified.
- OP * block_end(I32 floor, OP *seq)
Handles compile-time scope entry.
Arranges for hints to be restored on block
exit and also handles pad sequence numbers to make lexical variables scope
right. Returns a savestack index for use with block_end
.
Performs the default fixup of the arguments part of an entersub
op tree. This consists of applying list context to each of the
argument ops. This is the standard treatment used on a call marked
with &
, or a method call, or a call through a subroutine reference,
or any other call where the callee can't be identified at compile time,
or a call where the callee has no prototype.
- OP * ck_entersub_args_list(OP *entersubop)
Performs the fixup of the arguments part of an entersub
op tree
based on a subroutine prototype. This makes various modifications to
the argument ops, from applying context up to inserting refgen
ops,
and checking the number and syntactic types of arguments, as directed by
the prototype. This is the standard treatment used on a subroutine call,
not marked with &
, where the callee can be identified at compile time
and has a prototype.
protosv
supplies the subroutine prototype to be applied to the call.
It may be a normal defined scalar, of which the string value will be used.
Alternatively, for convenience, it may be a subroutine object (a CV*
that has been cast to SV*
) which has a prototype. The prototype
supplied, in whichever form, does not need to match the actual callee
referenced by the op tree.
If the argument ops disagree with the prototype, for example by having
an unacceptable number of arguments, a valid op tree is returned anyway.
The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single
exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. In the error message, the callee is referred to
by the name defined by the namegv
parameter.
- OP * ck_entersub_args_proto(OP *entersubop,
- GV *namegv, SV *protosv)
Performs the fixup of the arguments part of an entersub
op tree either
based on a subroutine prototype or using default list-context processing.
This is the standard treatment used on a subroutine call, not marked
with &
, where the callee can be identified at compile time.
protosv
supplies the subroutine prototype to be applied to the call,
or indicates that there is no prototype. It may be a normal scalar,
in which case if it is defined then the string value will be used
as a prototype, and if it is undefined then there is no prototype.
Alternatively, for convenience, it may be a subroutine object (a CV*
that has been cast to SV*
), of which the prototype will be used if it
has one. The prototype (or lack thereof) supplied, in whichever form,
does not need to match the actual callee referenced by the op tree.
If the argument ops disagree with the prototype, for example by having
an unacceptable number of arguments, a valid op tree is returned anyway.
The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single
exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. In the error message, the callee is referred to
by the name defined by the namegv
parameter.
- OP * ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list(OP *entersubop,
- GV *namegv,
- SV *protosv)
If cv
is a constant sub eligible for inlining, returns the constant
value returned by the sub. Otherwise, returns NULL
.
Constant subs can be created with newCONSTSUB
or as described in
Constant Functions in perlsub.
- SV* cv_const_sv(const CV *const cv)
Retrieves the function that will be used to fix up a call to cv
.
Specifically, the function is applied to an entersub
op tree for a
subroutine call, not marked with &
, where the callee can be identified
at compile time as cv
.
The C-level function pointer is returned in *ckfun_p
, and an SV
argument for it is returned in *ckobj_p
. The function is intended
to be called in this manner:
- entersubop = (*ckfun_p)(aTHX_ entersubop, namegv, (*ckobj_p));
In this call, entersubop
is a pointer to the entersub
op,
which may be replaced by the check function, and namegv
is a GV
supplying the name that should be used by the check function to refer
to the callee of the entersub
op if it needs to emit any diagnostics.
It is permitted to apply the check function in non-standard situations,
such as to a call to a different subroutine or to a method call.
By default, the function is
Perl_ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list,
and the SV parameter is cv
itself. This implements standard
prototype processing. It can be changed, for a particular subroutine,
by cv_set_call_checker.
- void cv_get_call_checker(CV *cv,
- Perl_call_checker *ckfun_p,
- SV **ckobj_p)
The original form of cv_set_call_checker_flags, which passes it the
CALL_CHECKER_REQUIRE_GV
flag for backward-compatibility.
- void cv_set_call_checker(CV *cv,
- Perl_call_checker ckfun,
- SV *ckobj)
Sets the function that will be used to fix up a call to cv
.
Specifically, the function is applied to an entersub
op tree for a
subroutine call, not marked with &
, where the callee can be identified
at compile time as cv
.
The C-level function pointer is supplied in ckfun
, and an SV argument
for it is supplied in ckobj
. The function should be defined like this:
- STATIC OP * ckfun(pTHX_ OP *op, GV *namegv, SV *ckobj)
It is intended to be called in this manner:
- entersubop = ckfun(aTHX_ entersubop, namegv, ckobj);
In this call, entersubop
is a pointer to the entersub
op,
which may be replaced by the check function, and namegv
supplies
the name that should be used by the check function to refer
to the callee of the entersub
op if it needs to emit any diagnostics.
It is permitted to apply the check function in non-standard situations,
such as to a call to a different subroutine or to a method call.
namegv
may not actually be a GV. For efficiency, perl may pass a
CV or other SV instead. Whatever is passed can be used as the first
argument to cv_name. You can force perl to pass a GV by including
CALL_CHECKER_REQUIRE_GV
in the flags
.
The current setting for a particular CV can be retrieved by cv_get_call_checker.
- void cv_set_call_checker_flags(
- CV *cv, Perl_call_checker ckfun, SV *ckobj,
- U32 flags
- )
Given the root of an optree, link the tree in execution order using the
op_next
pointers and return the first op executed. If this has
already been done, it will not be redone, and o->op_next
will be
returned. If o->op_next
is not already set, o
should be at
least an UNOP
.
- OP* LINKLIST(OP *o)
See newCONSTSUB_flags.
- CV* newCONSTSUB(HV* stash, const char* name, SV* sv)
Creates a constant sub equivalent to Perl sub FOO () { 123 }
which is
eligible for inlining at compile-time.
Currently, the only useful value for flags
is SVf_UTF8
.
The newly created subroutine takes ownership of a reference to the passed in SV.
Passing NULL
for SV creates a constant sub equivalent to sub BAR () {}
,
which won't be called if used as a destructor, but will suppress the overhead
of a call to AUTOLOAD
. (This form, however, isn't eligible for inlining at
compile time.)
- CV* newCONSTSUB_flags(HV* stash, const char* name,
- STRLEN len, U32 flags, SV* sv)
Used by xsubpp
to hook up XSUBs as Perl subs. filename
needs to be
static storage, as it is used directly as CvFILE(), without a copy being made.
Append an item to the list of ops contained directly within a list-type
op, returning the lengthened list. first
is the list-type op,
and last is the op to append to the list. optype
specifies the
intended opcode for the list. If first
is not already a list of the
right type, it will be upgraded into one. If either first
or last
is null, the other is returned unchanged.
- OP * op_append_elem(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)
Concatenate the lists of ops contained directly within two list-type ops,
returning the combined list. first
and last are the list-type ops
to concatenate. optype
specifies the intended opcode for the list.
If either first
or last is not already a list of the right type,
it will be upgraded into one. If either first
or last is null,
the other is returned unchanged.
- OP * op_append_list(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)
Return the class of the provided OP: that is, which of the *OP
structures it uses. For core ops this currently gets the information out
of PL_opargs
, which does not always accurately reflect the type used;
in v5.26 onwards, see also the function op_class which can do a better
job of determining the used type.
For custom ops the type is returned from the registration, and it is up
to the registree to ensure it is accurate. The value returned will be
one of the OA_
* constants from op.h.
- U32 OP_CLASS(OP *o)
Applies a syntactic context to an op tree representing an expression.
o
is the op tree, and context
must be G_SCALAR
, G_ARRAY
,
or G_VOID
to specify the context to apply. The modified op tree
is returned.
- OP * op_contextualize(OP *o, I32 context)
Converts o
into a list op if it is not one already, and then converts it
into the specified type
, calling its check function, allocating a target if
it needs one, and folding constants.
A list-type op is usually constructed one kid at a time via newLISTOP
,
op_prepend_elem
and op_append_elem
. Then finally it is passed to
op_convert_list
to make it the right type.
- OP * op_convert_list(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *o)
Return a short description of the provided OP.
- const char * OP_DESC(OP *o)
Free an op. Only use this when an op is no longer linked to from any optree.
- void op_free(OP *o)
Returns true if o
has a sibling
- bool OpHAS_SIBLING(OP *o)
Marks o
as having no further siblings. On PERL_OP_PARENT
builds, marks
o as having the specified parent. See also OpMORESIB_set and
OpMAYBESIB_set
. For a higher-level interface, see
op_sibling_splice.
- void OpLASTSIB_set(OP *o, OP *parent)
This function is the implementation of the LINKLIST macro. It should not be called directly.
- OP* op_linklist(OP *o)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Propagate lvalue ("modifiable") context to an op and its children.
type
represents the context type, roughly based on the type of op that
would do the modifying, although local() is represented by OP_NULL
,
because it has no op type of its own (it is signalled by a flag on
the lvalue op).
This function detects things that can't be modified, such as $x+1
, and
generates errors for them. For example, $x+1 = 2
would cause it to be
called with an op of type OP_ADD
and a type
argument of OP_SASSIGN
.
It also flags things that need to behave specially in an lvalue context,
such as $$x = 5
which might have to vivify a reference in $x
.
- OP * op_lvalue(OP *o, I32 type)
Conditionally does OpMORESIB_set
or OpLASTSIB_set
depending on whether
sib
is non-null. For a higher-level interface, see op_sibling_splice.
- void OpMAYBESIB_set(OP *o, OP *sib, OP *parent)
Sets the sibling of o
to the non-zero value sib
. See also OpLASTSIB_set
and OpMAYBESIB_set. For a higher-level interface, see
op_sibling_splice.
- void OpMORESIB_set(OP *o, OP *sib)
Return the name of the provided OP. For core ops this looks up the name from the op_type; for custom ops from the op_ppaddr.
- const char * OP_NAME(OP *o)
Neutralizes an op when it is no longer needed, but is still linked to from other ops.
- void op_null(OP *o)
Returns the parent OP of o
, if it has a parent. Returns NULL
otherwise.
This function is only available on perls built with -DPERL_OP_PARENT
.
- OP* op_parent(OP *o)
Prepend an item to the list of ops contained directly within a list-type
op, returning the lengthened list. first
is the op to prepend to the
list, and last is the list-type op. optype
specifies the intended
opcode for the list. If last is not already a list of the right type,
it will be upgraded into one. If either first
or last is null,
the other is returned unchanged.
- OP * op_prepend_elem(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Wraps up an op tree with some additional ops so that at runtime a dynamic
scope will be created. The original ops run in the new dynamic scope,
and then, provided that they exit normally, the scope will be unwound.
The additional ops used to create and unwind the dynamic scope will
normally be an enter
/leave
pair, but a scope
op may be used
instead if the ops are simple enough to not need the full dynamic scope
structure.
- OP * op_scope(OP *o)
Returns the sibling of o
, or NULL
if there is no sibling
- OP* OpSIBLING(OP *o)
A general function for editing the structure of an existing chain of
op_sibling nodes. By analogy with the perl-level splice() function, allows
you to delete zero or more sequential nodes, replacing them with zero or
more different nodes. Performs the necessary op_first/op_last
housekeeping on the parent node and op_sibling manipulation on the
children. The last deleted node will be marked as as the last node by
updating the op_sibling/op_sibparent or op_moresib field as appropriate.
Note that op_next is not manipulated, and nodes are not freed; that is the responsibility of the caller. It also won't create a new list op for an empty list etc; use higher-level functions like op_append_elem() for that.
parent
is the parent node of the sibling chain. It may passed as NULL
if
the splicing doesn't affect the first or last op in the chain.
start
is the node preceding the first node to be spliced. Node(s)
following it will be deleted, and ops will be inserted after it. If it is
NULL
, the first node onwards is deleted, and nodes are inserted at the
beginning.
del_count
is the number of nodes to delete. If zero, no nodes are deleted.
If -1 or greater than or equal to the number of remaining kids, all
remaining kids are deleted.
insert
is the first of a chain of nodes to be inserted in place of the nodes.
If NULL
, no nodes are inserted.
The head of the chain of deleted ops is returned, or NULL
if no ops were
deleted.
For example:
For lower-level direct manipulation of op_sibparent
and op_moresib
,
see OpMORESIB_set, OpLASTSIB_set, OpMAYBESIB_set.
- OP* op_sibling_splice(OP *parent, OP *start,
- int del_count, OP* insert)
Returns true if the given OP is not a NULL
pointer
and if it is of the given type.
The negation of this macro, OP_TYPE_ISNT
is also available
as well as OP_TYPE_IS_NN
and OP_TYPE_ISNT_NN
which elide
the NULL pointer check.
- bool OP_TYPE_IS(OP *o, Optype type)
Returns true if the given OP is not a NULL pointer and if it is of the given type or used to be before being replaced by an OP of type OP_NULL.
The negation of this macro, OP_TYPE_ISNT_AND_WASNT
is also available as well as OP_TYPE_IS_OR_WAS_NN
and OP_TYPE_ISNT_AND_WASNT_NN
which elide
the NULL
pointer check.
- bool OP_TYPE_IS_OR_WAS(OP *o, Optype type)
Examines an op, which is expected to identify a subroutine at runtime,
and attempts to determine at compile time which subroutine it identifies.
This is normally used during Perl compilation to determine whether
a prototype can be applied to a function call. cvop
is the op
being considered, normally an rv2cv
op. A pointer to the identified
subroutine is returned, if it could be determined statically, and a null
pointer is returned if it was not possible to determine statically.
Currently, the subroutine can be identified statically if the RV that the
rv2cv
is to operate on is provided by a suitable gv
or const
op.
A gv
op is suitable if the GV's CV slot is populated. A const
op is
suitable if the constant value must be an RV pointing to a CV. Details of
this process may change in future versions of Perl. If the rv2cv
op
has the OPpENTERSUB_AMPER
flag set then no attempt is made to identify
the subroutine statically: this flag is used to suppress compile-time
magic on a subroutine call, forcing it to use default runtime behaviour.
If flags
has the bit RV2CVOPCV_MARK_EARLY
set, then the handling
of a GV reference is modified. If a GV was examined and its CV slot was
found to be empty, then the gv
op has the OPpEARLY_CV
flag set.
If the op is not optimised away, and the CV slot is later populated with
a subroutine having a prototype, that flag eventually triggers the warning
"called too early to check prototype".
If flags
has the bit RV2CVOPCV_RETURN_NAME_GV
set, then instead
of returning a pointer to the subroutine it returns a pointer to the
GV giving the most appropriate name for the subroutine in this context.
Normally this is just the CvGV
of the subroutine, but for an anonymous
(CvANON
) subroutine that is referenced through a GV it will be the
referencing GV. The resulting GV*
is cast to CV*
to be returned.
A null pointer is returned as usual if there is no statically-determinable
subroutine.
- CV * rv2cv_op_cv(OP *cvop, U32 flags)
The engine implementing pack() Perl function.
- void packlist(SV *cat, const char *pat,
- const char *patend, SV **beglist,
- SV **endlist)
The engine implementing the unpack() Perl function.
Using the template pat..patend
, this function unpacks the string
s..strend into a number of mortal SVs, which it pushes onto the perl
argument (@_
) stack (so you will need to issue a PUTBACK
before and
SPAGAIN
after the call to this function). It returns the number of
pushed elements.
The strend
and patend
pointers should point to the byte following the
last character of each string.
Although this function returns its values on the perl argument stack, it
doesn't take any parameters from that stack (and thus in particular
there's no need to do a PUSHMARK
before calling it, unlike call_pv for
example).
- I32 unpackstring(const char *pat,
- const char *patend, const char *s,
- const char *strend, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
CV's can have CvPADLIST(cv) set to point to a PADLIST. This is the CV's scratchpad, which stores lexical variables and opcode temporary and per-thread values.
For these purposes "formats" are a kind-of CV; eval""s are too (except they're not callable at will and are always thrown away after the eval"" is done executing). Require'd files are simply evals without any outer lexical scope.
XSUBs do not have a CvPADLIST
. dXSTARG
fetches values from PL_curpad
,
but that is really the callers pad (a slot of which is allocated by
every entersub). Do not get or set CvPADLIST
if a CV is an XSUB (as
determined by CvISXSUB()
), CvPADLIST
slot is reused for a different
internal purpose in XSUBs.
The PADLIST has a C array where pads are stored.
The 0th entry of the PADLIST is a PADNAMELIST which represents the "names" or rather the "static type information" for lexicals. The individual elements of a PADNAMELIST are PADNAMEs. Future refactorings might stop the PADNAMELIST from being stored in the PADLIST's array, so don't rely on it. See PadlistNAMES.
The CvDEPTH'th entry of a PADLIST is a PAD (an AV) which is the stack frame
at that depth of recursion into the CV. The 0th slot of a frame AV is an
AV which is @_
. Other entries are storage for variables and op targets.
Iterating over the PADNAMELIST iterates over all possible pad
items. Pad slots for targets (SVs_PADTMP
)
and GVs end up having &PL_padname_undef "names", while slots for constants
have &PL_padname_const
"names" (see pad_alloc). That
&PL_padname_undef
and &PL_padname_const
are used is an implementation detail subject to
change. To test for them, use !PadnamePV(name)
and
PadnamePV(name) && !PadnameLEN(name)
, respectively.
Only my/our variable slots get valid names.
The rest are op targets/GVs/constants which are statically allocated
or resolved at compile time. These don't have names by which they
can be looked up from Perl code at run time through eval"" the way
my/our variables can be. Since they can't be looked up by "name"
but only by their index allocated at compile time (which is usually
in PL_op-
op_targ>), wasting a name SV for them doesn't make sense.
The pad names in the PADNAMELIST have their PV holding the name of
the variable. The COP_SEQ_RANGE_LOW
and _HIGH
fields form a range
(low+1..high inclusive) of cop_seq numbers for which the name is
valid. During compilation, these fields may hold the special value
PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO to indicate various stages:
When a lexical var hasn't yet been introduced, it already exists from the perspective of duplicate declarations, but not for variable lookups, e.g.
For typed lexicals PadnameTYPE
points at the type stash. For our
lexicals, PadnameOURSTASH
points at the stash of the associated global (so
that duplicate our declarations in the same package can be detected).
PadnameGEN
is sometimes used to store the generation number during
compilation.
If PadnameOUTER
is set on the pad name, then that slot in the frame AV
is a REFCNT'ed reference to a lexical from "outside". Such entries
are sometimes referred to as 'fake'. In this case, the name does not
use 'low' and 'high' to store a cop_seq range, since it is in scope
throughout. Instead 'high' stores some flags containing info about
the real lexical (is it declared in an anon, and is it capable of being
instantiated multiple times?), and for fake ANONs, 'low' contains the index
within the parent's pad where the lexical's value is stored, to make
cloning quicker.
If the 'name' is &
the corresponding entry in the PAD
is a CV representing a possible closure.
Note that formats are treated as anon subs, and are cloned each time write is called (if necessary).
The flag SVs_PADSTALE
is cleared on lexicals each time the my() is executed,
and set on scope exit. This allows the
"Variable $x is not available"
warning
to be generated in evals, such as
For state vars, SVs_PADSTALE
is overloaded to mean 'not yet initialised',
but this internal state is stored in a separate pad entry.
- PADLIST * CvPADLIST(CV *cv)
Exactly like pad_add_name_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
- PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pvs(const char *name, U32 flags,
- HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The C array of pad entries.
- SV ** PadARRAY(PAD pad)
Exactly like pad_findmy_pvn, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
- PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pvs(const char *name, U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The C array of a padlist, containing the pads. Only subscript it with numbers >= 1, as the 0th entry is not guaranteed to remain usable.
- PAD ** PadlistARRAY(PADLIST padlist)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The index of the last allocated space in the padlist. Note that the last
pad may be in an earlier slot. Any entries following it will be NULL
in
that case.
- SSize_t PadlistMAX(PADLIST padlist)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The names associated with pad entries.
- PADNAMELIST * PadlistNAMES(PADLIST padlist)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The C array of pad names.
- PADNAME ** PadlistNAMESARRAY(PADLIST padlist)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The index of the last pad name.
- SSize_t PadlistNAMESMAX(PADLIST padlist)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The reference count of the padlist. Currently this is always 1.
- U32 PadlistREFCNT(PADLIST padlist)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The index of the last pad entry.
- SSize_t PadMAX(PAD pad)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The length of the name.
- STRLEN PadnameLEN(PADNAME pn)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The C array of pad names.
- PADNAME ** PadnamelistARRAY(PADNAMELIST pnl)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The index of the last pad name.
- SSize_t PadnamelistMAX(PADNAMELIST pnl)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The reference count of the pad name list.
- SSize_t PadnamelistREFCNT(PADNAMELIST pnl)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Lowers the reference count of the pad name list.
- void PadnamelistREFCNT_dec(PADNAMELIST pnl)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The name stored in the pad name struct. This returns NULL
for a target
slot.
- char * PadnamePV(PADNAME pn)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
The reference count of the pad name.
- SSize_t PadnameREFCNT(PADNAME pn)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Lowers the reference count of the pad name.
- void PadnameREFCNT_dec(PADNAME pn)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Returns the pad name as a mortal SV.
- SV * PadnameSV(PADNAME pn)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Whether PadnamePV is in UTF-8. Currently, this is always true.
- bool PadnameUTF8(PADNAME pn)
Create a new padlist, updating the global variables for the currently-compiling padlist to point to the new padlist. The following flags can be OR'ed together:
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
During compilation, this points to the array containing the values part of the pad for the currently-compiling code. (At runtime a CV may have many such value arrays; at compile time just one is constructed.) At runtime, this points to the array containing the currently-relevant values for the pad for the currently-executing code.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
During compilation, this points to the array containing the names part of the pad for the currently-compiling code.
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Points directly to the body of the PL_comppad array.
(I.e., this is PAD_ARRAY(PL_comppad)
.)
PL_modglobal
is a general purpose, interpreter global HV for use by
extensions that need to keep information on a per-interpreter basis.
In a pinch, it can also be used as a symbol table for extensions
to share data among each other. It is a good idea to use keys
prefixed by the package name of the extension that owns the data.
- HV* PL_modglobal
A convenience variable which is typically used with SvPV
when one
doesn't care about the length of the string. It is usually more efficient
to either declare a local variable and use that instead or to use the
SvPV_nolen
macro.
- STRLEN PL_na
When non-NULL
, the function pointed by this variable will be called each time an OP is freed with the corresponding OP as the argument.
This allows extensions to free any extra attribute they have locally attached to an OP.
It is also assured to first fire for the parent OP and then for its kids.
When you replace this variable, it is considered a good practice to store the possibly previously installed hook and that you recall it inside your own.
- Perl_ophook_t PL_opfreehook
Pointer to the per-subroutine peephole optimiser. This is a function that gets called at the end of compilation of a Perl subroutine (or equivalently independent piece of Perl code) to perform fixups of some ops and to perform small-scale optimisations. The function is called once for each subroutine that is compiled, and is passed, as sole parameter, a pointer to the op that is the entry point to the subroutine. It modifies the op tree in place.
The peephole optimiser should never be completely replaced. Rather, add code to it by wrapping the existing optimiser. The basic way to do this can be seen in Compile pass 3: peephole optimization in perlguts. If the new code wishes to operate on ops throughout the subroutine's structure, rather than just at the top level, it is likely to be more convenient to wrap the PL_rpeepp hook.
- peep_t PL_peepp
Pointer to the recursive peephole optimiser. This is a function
that gets called at the end of compilation of a Perl subroutine (or
equivalently independent piece of Perl code) to perform fixups of some
ops and to perform small-scale optimisations. The function is called
once for each chain of ops linked through their op_next
fields;
it is recursively called to handle each side chain. It is passed, as
sole parameter, a pointer to the op that is at the head of the chain.
It modifies the op tree in place.
The peephole optimiser should never be completely replaced. Rather, add code to it by wrapping the existing optimiser. The basic way to do this can be seen in Compile pass 3: peephole optimization in perlguts. If the new code wishes to operate only on ops at a subroutine's top level, rather than throughout the structure, it is likely to be more convenient to wrap the PL_peepp hook.
- peep_t PL_rpeepp
This is the false
SV. See PL_sv_yes. Always refer to this as
&PL_sv_no
.
- SV PL_sv_no
This is the undef SV. Always refer to this as &PL_sv_undef
.
- SV PL_sv_undef
This is the true
SV. See PL_sv_no. Always refer to this as
&PL_sv_yes
.
- SV PL_sv_yes
Convenience macro to get the REGEXP from a SV. This is approximately equivalent to the following snippet:
- if (SvMAGICAL(sv))
- mg_get(sv);
- if (SvROK(sv))
- sv = MUTABLE_SV(SvRV(sv));
- if (SvTYPE(sv) == SVt_REGEXP)
- return (REGEXP*) sv;
NULL
will be returned if a REGEXP* is not found.
- REGEXP * SvRX(SV *sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV (or the one it references) is a REGEXP.
If you want to do something with the REGEXP* later use SvRX instead and check for NULL.
- bool SvRXOK(SV* sv)
Declare a stack marker variable, mark
, for the XSUB. See MARK and
dORIGMARK.
- dMARK;
Saves the original stack mark for the XSUB. See ORIGMARK.
- dORIGMARK;
Declares a local copy of perl's stack pointer for the XSUB, available via
the SP
macro. See SP.
- dSP;
Used to extend the argument stack for an XSUB's return values. Once
used, guarantees that there is room for at least nitems
to be pushed
onto the stack.
- void EXTEND(SP, SSize_t nitems)
Stack marker variable for the XSUB. See dMARK.
Push an integer onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
Does not use TARG
. See also PUSHi, mXPUSHi and XPUSHi.
- void mPUSHi(IV iv)
Push a double onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
Does not use TARG
. See also PUSHn, mXPUSHn and XPUSHn.
- void mPUSHn(NV nv)
Push a string onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
The len
indicates the length of the string. Does not use TARG
.
See also PUSHp, mXPUSHp and XPUSHp.
- void mPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
Push an SV onto the stack and mortalizes the SV. The stack must have room
for this element. Does not use TARG
. See also PUSHs and
mXPUSHs.
- void mPUSHs(SV* sv)
Push an unsigned integer onto the stack. The stack must have room for this
element. Does not use TARG
. See also PUSHu, mXPUSHu and
XPUSHu.
- void mPUSHu(UV uv)
Push an integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Does not use TARG
. See also XPUSHi, mPUSHi and PUSHi.
- void mXPUSHi(IV iv)
Push a double onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Does not use TARG
. See also XPUSHn, mPUSHn and PUSHn.
- void mXPUSHn(NV nv)
Push a string onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary. The len
indicates the length of the string. Does not use TARG
. See also
XPUSHp, mPUSHp
and PUSHp
.
- void mXPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
Push an SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary and mortalizes
the SV. Does not use TARG
. See also XPUSHs and mPUSHs.
- void mXPUSHs(SV* sv)
Push an unsigned integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Does not use TARG
. See also XPUSHu, mPUSHu and PUSHu.
- void mXPUSHu(UV uv)
The original stack mark for the XSUB. See dORIGMARK.
Pops an integer off the stack.
- IV POPi
Pops a long off the stack.
- long POPl
Pops a double off the stack.
- NV POPn
Pops a string off the stack.
- char* POPp
Pops a string off the stack which must consist of bytes i.e. characters < 256.
- char* POPpbytex
Pops a string off the stack. Identical to POPp. There are two names for historical reasons.
- char* POPpx
Pops an SV off the stack.
- SV* POPs
Pops an unsigned integer off the stack.
- UV POPu
Pops an unsigned long off the stack.
- long POPul
Push an integer onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
Handles 'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be
called to declare it. Do not call multiple TARG
-oriented macros to
return lists from XSUB's - see mPUSHi instead. See also XPUSHi
and mXPUSHi.
- void PUSHi(IV iv)
Opening bracket for arguments on a callback. See PUTBACK and
perlcall.
- void PUSHMARK(SP)
Push a new mortal SV onto the stack. The stack must have room for this
element. Does not use TARG
. See also PUSHs, XPUSHmortal and
XPUSHs.
- void PUSHmortal()
Push a double onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
Handles 'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be
called to declare it. Do not call multiple TARG
-oriented macros to
return lists from XSUB's - see mPUSHn instead. See also XPUSHn
and mXPUSHn.
- void PUSHn(NV nv)
Push a string onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
The len
indicates the length of the string. Handles 'set' magic. Uses
TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be called to declare it. Do not
call multiple TARG
-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
mPUSHp instead. See also XPUSHp and mXPUSHp.
- void PUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
Push an SV onto the stack. The stack must have room for this element.
Does not handle 'set' magic. Does not use TARG
. See also
PUSHmortal, XPUSHs, and XPUSHmortal.
- void PUSHs(SV* sv)
Push an unsigned integer onto the stack. The stack must have room for this
element. Handles 'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be called to declare it. Do not call multiple TARG
-oriented
macros to return lists from XSUB's - see mPUSHu instead. See also
XPUSHu and mXPUSHu.
- void PUSHu(UV uv)
Closing bracket for XSUB arguments. This is usually handled by xsubpp
.
See PUSHMARK and perlcall for other uses.
- PUTBACK;
Stack pointer. This is usually handled by xsubpp
. See dSP and
SPAGAIN
.
Refetch the stack pointer. Used after a callback. See perlcall.
- SPAGAIN;
Push an integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary. Handles
'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be called to
declare it. Do not call multiple TARG
-oriented macros to return lists
from XSUB's - see mXPUSHi instead. See also PUSHi and
mPUSHi.
- void XPUSHi(IV iv)
Push a new mortal SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Does not use TARG
. See also XPUSHs, PUSHmortal and
PUSHs.
- void XPUSHmortal()
Push a double onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary. Handles
'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be called to
declare it. Do not call multiple TARG
-oriented macros to return lists
from XSUB's - see mXPUSHn instead. See also PUSHn and
mPUSHn.
- void XPUSHn(NV nv)
Push a string onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary. The len
indicates the length of the string. Handles 'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so
dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be called to declare it. Do not call
multiple TARG
-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
mXPUSHp instead. See also PUSHp and mPUSHp.
- void XPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
Push an SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary. Does not
handle 'set' magic. Does not use TARG
. See also XPUSHmortal,
PUSHs
and PUSHmortal
.
- void XPUSHs(SV* sv)
Push an unsigned integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Handles 'set' magic. Uses TARG
, so dTARGET
or dXSTARG
should be
called to declare it. Do not call multiple TARG
-oriented macros to
return lists from XSUB's - see mXPUSHu instead. See also PUSHu and
mPUSHu.
- void XPUSHu(UV uv)
Return from XSUB, indicating number of items on the stack. This is usually
handled by xsubpp
.
- void XSRETURN(int nitems)
Return an empty list from an XSUB immediately.
- XSRETURN_EMPTY;
Return an integer from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mIV
.
- void XSRETURN_IV(IV iv)
Return &PL_sv_no
from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mNO
.
- XSRETURN_NO;
Return a double from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mNV
.
- void XSRETURN_NV(NV nv)
Return a copy of a string from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mPV
.
- void XSRETURN_PV(char* str)
Return &PL_sv_undef
from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mUNDEF
.
- XSRETURN_UNDEF;
Return an integer from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mUV
.
- void XSRETURN_UV(IV uv)
Return &PL_sv_yes
from an XSUB immediately. Uses XST_mYES
.
- XSRETURN_YES;
Place an integer into the specified position pos on the stack. The
value is stored in a new mortal SV.
Place &PL_sv_no
into the specified position pos on the
stack.
Place a double into the specified position pos on the stack. The value
is stored in a new mortal SV.
Place a copy of a string into the specified position pos on the stack.
The value is stored in a new mortal SV.
Place &PL_sv_undef
into the specified position pos on the
stack.
Place &PL_sv_yes
into the specified position pos on the
stack.
Test if the content of an SV looks like a number (or is a number).
Inf
and Infinity
are treated as numbers (so will not issue a
non-numeric warning), even if your atof()
doesn't grok them. Get-magic is
ignored.
- I32 looks_like_number(SV *const sv)
Creates an RV wrapper for an SV. The reference count for the original SV is not incremented.
- SV* newRV_noinc(SV *const tmpRef)
Creates a new SV. A non-zero len
parameter indicates the number of
bytes of preallocated string space the SV should have. An extra byte for a
trailing NUL
is also reserved. (SvPOK
is not set for the SV even if string
space is allocated.) The reference count for the new SV is set to 1.
In 5.9.3, newSV()
replaces the older NEWSV()
API, and drops the first
parameter, x, a debug aid which allowed callers to identify themselves.
This aid has been superseded by a new build option, PERL_MEM_LOG
(see
PERL_MEM_LOG in perlhacktips). The older API is still there for use in XS
modules supporting older perls.
- SV* newSV(const STRLEN len)
Creates a new SV from the hash key structure. It will generate scalars that
point to the shared string table where possible. Returns a new (undefined)
SV if hek
is NULL.
- SV* newSVhek(const HEK *const hek)
Creates a new SV and copies an integer into it. The reference count for the SV is set to 1.
- SV* newSViv(const IV i)
Creates a new SV and copies a floating point value into it. The reference count for the SV is set to 1.
- SV* newSVnv(const NV n)
Creates a new SV and copies a string (which may contain NUL
(\0
)
characters) into it. The reference count for the
SV is set to 1. If len
is zero, Perl will compute the length using
strlen()
, (which means if you use this option, that s can't have embedded
NUL
characters and has to have a terminating NUL
byte).
This function can cause reliability issues if you are likely to pass in empty strings that are not null terminated, because it will run strlen on the string and potentially run past valid memory.
Using newSVpvn is a safer alternative for non NUL
terminated strings.
For string literals use newSVpvs instead. This function will work fine for
NUL
terminated strings, but if you want to avoid the if statement on whether
to call strlen
use newSVpvn
instead (calling strlen
yourself).
- SV* newSVpv(const char *const s, const STRLEN len)
Creates a new SV and initializes it with the string formatted like
sv_catpvf
.
- SV* newSVpvf(const char *const pat, ...)
Creates a new SV and copies a string into it, which may contain NUL
characters
(\0
) and other binary data. The reference count for the SV is set to 1.
Note that if len
is zero, Perl will create a zero length (Perl) string. You
are responsible for ensuring that the source buffer is at least
len
bytes long. If the buffer
argument is NULL the new SV will be
undefined.
- SV* newSVpvn(const char *const s, const STRLEN len)
Creates a new SV and copies a string (which may contain NUL
(\0
)
characters) into it. The reference count for the
SV is set to 1. Note that if len
is zero, Perl will create a zero length
string. You are responsible for ensuring that the source string is at least
len
bytes long. If the s argument is NULL the new SV will be undefined.
Currently the only flag bits accepted are SVf_UTF8
and SVs_TEMP
.
If SVs_TEMP
is set, then sv_2mortal()
is called on the result before
returning. If SVf_UTF8
is set, s
is considered to be in UTF-8 and the
SVf_UTF8
flag will be set on the new SV.
newSVpvn_utf8()
is a convenience wrapper for this function, defined as
- #define newSVpvn_utf8(s, len, u) \
- newSVpvn_flags((s), (len), (u) ? SVf_UTF8 : 0)
- SV* newSVpvn_flags(const char *const s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U32 flags)
Creates a new SV with its SvPVX_const
pointing to a shared string in the string
table. If the string does not already exist in the table, it is
created first. Turns on the SvIsCOW
flag (or READONLY
and FAKE
in 5.16 and earlier). If the hash
parameter
is non-zero, that value is used; otherwise the hash is computed.
The string's hash can later be retrieved from the SV
with the SvSHARED_HASH()
macro. The idea here is
that as the string table is used for shared hash keys these strings will have
SvPVX_const == HeKEY
and hash lookup will avoid string compare.
- SV* newSVpvn_share(const char* s, I32 len, U32 hash)
Like newSVpvn
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- SV* newSVpvs(const char* s)
Like newSVpvn_flags
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of
a string/length pair.
- SV* newSVpvs_flags(const char* s, U32 flags)
Like newSVpvn_share
, but takes a NUL
-terminated string instead of a
string/length pair.
- SV* newSVpv_share(const char* s, U32 hash)
Like newSVpvn_share
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of
a string/length pair and omits the hash parameter.
- SV* newSVpvs_share(const char* s)
Creates a new SV for the existing RV, rv
, to point to. If rv
is not an
RV then it will be upgraded to one. If classname
is non-null then the new
SV will be blessed in the specified package. The new SV is returned and its
reference count is 1. The reference count 1 is owned by rv
.
- SV* newSVrv(SV *const rv,
- const char *const classname)
Creates a new SV which is an exact duplicate of the original SV.
(Uses sv_setsv
.)
- SV* newSVsv(SV *const old)
Creates a new SV, of the type specified. The reference count for the new SV is set to 1.
- SV* newSV_type(const svtype type)
Creates a new SV and copies an unsigned integer into it. The reference count for the SV is set to 1.
- SV* newSVuv(const UV u)
This macro is only used by sv_true()
or its macro equivalent, and only if
the latter's argument is neither SvPOK
, SvIOK
nor SvNOK
.
It calls sv_2bool_flags
with the SV_GMAGIC
flag.
- bool sv_2bool(SV *const sv)
This function is only used by sv_true()
and friends, and only if
the latter's argument is neither SvPOK
, SvIOK
nor SvNOK
. If the flags
contain SV_GMAGIC
, then it does an mg_get()
first.
- bool sv_2bool_flags(SV *sv, I32 flags)
Using various gambits, try to get a CV from an SV; in addition, try if
possible to set *st
and *gvp
to the stash and GV associated with it.
The flags in lref
are passed to gv_fetchsv
.
- CV* sv_2cv(SV* sv, HV **const st, GV **const gvp,
- const I32 lref)
Using various gambits, try to get an IO from an SV: the IO slot if its a GV; or the recursive result if we're an RV; or the IO slot of the symbol named after the PV if we're a string.
'Get' magic is ignored on the sv
passed in, but will be called on
SvRV(sv)
if sv
is an RV.
- IO* sv_2io(SV *const sv)
Return the integer value of an SV, doing any necessary string
conversion. If flags
has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, does an mg_get()
first.
Normally used via the SvIV(sv)
and SvIVx(sv)
macros.
- IV sv_2iv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)
Marks an existing SV as mortal. The SV will be destroyed "soon", either
by an explicit call to FREETMPS
, or by an implicit call at places such as
statement boundaries. SvTEMP()
is turned on which means that the SV's
string buffer can be "stolen" if this SV is copied. See also
sv_newmortal and sv_mortalcopy.
- SV* sv_2mortal(SV *const sv)
Return the num value of an SV, doing any necessary string or integer
conversion. If flags
has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, does an mg_get()
first.
Normally used via the SvNV(sv)
and SvNVx(sv)
macros.
- NV sv_2nv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)
Return a pointer to the byte-encoded representation of the SV, and set *lp
to its length. May cause the SV to be downgraded from UTF-8 as a
side-effect.
Usually accessed via the SvPVbyte
macro.
- char* sv_2pvbyte(SV *sv, STRLEN *const lp)
Return a pointer to the UTF-8-encoded representation of the SV, and set *lp
to its length. May cause the SV to be upgraded to UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the SvPVutf8
macro.
- char* sv_2pvutf8(SV *sv, STRLEN *const lp)
Returns a pointer to the string value of an SV, and sets *lp
to its length.
If flags has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, does an mg_get()
first. Coerces sv
to a
string if necessary. Normally invoked via the SvPV_flags
macro.
sv_2pv()
and sv_2pv_nomg
usually end up here too.
- char* sv_2pv_flags(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp,
- const I32 flags)
Return the unsigned integer value of an SV, doing any necessary string
conversion. If flags
has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, does an mg_get()
first.
Normally used via the SvUV(sv)
and SvUVx(sv)
macros.
- UV sv_2uv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)
Remove any string offset. You should normally use the SvOOK_off
macro
wrapper instead.
- void sv_backoff(SV *const sv)
Blesses an SV into a specified package. The SV must be an RV. The package
must be designated by its stash (see gv_stashpv). The reference count
of the SV is unaffected.
- SV* sv_bless(SV *const sv, HV *const stash)
Concatenates the NUL
-terminated string onto the end of the string which is
in the SV.
If the SV has the UTF-8 status set, then the bytes appended should be
valid UTF-8. Handles 'get' magic, but not 'set' magic. See
sv_catpv_mg.
- void sv_catpv(SV *const sv, const char* ptr)
Processes its arguments like sv_catpvfn
, and appends the formatted
output to an SV. As with sv_catpvfn
called with a non-null C-style
variable argument list, argument reordering is not supported.
If the appended data contains "wide" characters
(including, but not limited to, SVs with a UTF-8 PV formatted with %s
,
and characters >255 formatted with %c
), the original SV might get
upgraded to UTF-8. Handles 'get' magic, but not 'set' magic. See
sv_catpvf_mg. If the original SV was UTF-8, the pattern should be
valid UTF-8; if the original SV was bytes, the pattern should be too.
- void sv_catpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
- ...)
Like sv_catpvf
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_catpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
- const char *const pat, ...)
Concatenates the string onto the end of the string which is in the SV.
len
indicates number of bytes to copy. If the SV has the UTF-8
status set, then the bytes appended should be valid UTF-8.
Handles 'get' magic, but not 'set' magic. See sv_catpvn_mg.
- void sv_catpvn(SV *dsv, const char *sstr, STRLEN len)
Concatenates the string onto the end of the string which is in the SV. The
len
indicates number of bytes to copy.
By default, the string appended is assumed to be valid UTF-8 if the SV has
the UTF-8 status set, and a string of bytes otherwise. One can force the
appended string to be interpreted as UTF-8 by supplying the SV_CATUTF8
flag, and as bytes by supplying the SV_CATBYTES
flag; the SV or the
string appended will be upgraded to UTF-8 if necessary.
If flags
has the SV_SMAGIC
bit set, will
mg_set
on dsv
afterwards if appropriate.
sv_catpvn
and sv_catpvn_nomg
are implemented
in terms of this function.
- void sv_catpvn_flags(SV *const dstr,
- const char *sstr,
- const STRLEN len,
- const I32 flags)
Like sv_catpvn
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- void sv_catpvs(SV* sv, const char* s)
Like sv_catpvn_flags
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead
of a string/length pair.
- void sv_catpvs_flags(SV* sv, const char* s,
- I32 flags)
Like sv_catpvn_mg
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- void sv_catpvs_mg(SV* sv, const char* s)
Like sv_catpvn_nomg
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of
a string/length pair.
- void sv_catpvs_nomg(SV* sv, const char* s)
Concatenates the NUL
-terminated string onto the end of the string which is
in the SV.
If the SV has the UTF-8 status set, then the bytes appended should
be valid UTF-8. If flags
has the SV_SMAGIC
bit set, will mg_set
on the modified SV if appropriate.
- void sv_catpv_flags(SV *dstr, const char *sstr,
- const I32 flags)
Like sv_catpv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_catpv_mg(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
Concatenates the string from SV ssv
onto the end of the string in SV
dsv
. If ssv
is null, does nothing; otherwise modifies only dsv
.
Handles 'get' magic on both SVs, but no 'set' magic. See sv_catsv_mg
and sv_catsv_nomg.
- void sv_catsv(SV *dstr, SV *sstr)
Concatenates the string from SV ssv
onto the end of the string in SV
dsv
. If ssv
is null, does nothing; otherwise modifies only dsv
.
If flags
has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, will call mg_get
on both SVs if
appropriate. If flags
has the SV_SMAGIC
bit set, mg_set
will be called on
the modified SV afterward, if appropriate. sv_catsv
, sv_catsv_nomg
,
and sv_catsv_mg
are implemented in terms of this function.
- void sv_catsv_flags(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv,
- const I32 flags)
Efficient removal of characters from the beginning of the string buffer.
SvPOK(sv)
, or at least SvPOKp(sv)
, must be true and ptr
must be a
pointer to somewhere inside the string buffer. ptr
becomes the first
character of the adjusted string. Uses the OOK
hack. On return, only
SvPOK(sv)
and SvPOKp(sv)
among the OK
flags will be true.
Beware: after this function returns, ptr
and SvPVX_const(sv) may no longer
refer to the same chunk of data.
The unfortunate similarity of this function's name to that of Perl's chop
operator is strictly coincidental. This function works from the left;
chop works from the right.
- void sv_chop(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
Clear an SV: call any destructors, free up any memory used by the body,
and free the body itself. The SV's head is not freed, although
its type is set to all 1's so that it won't inadvertently be assumed
to be live during global destruction etc.
This function should only be called when REFCNT
is zero. Most of the time
you'll want to call sv_free()
(or its macro wrapper SvREFCNT_dec
)
instead.
- void sv_clear(SV *const orig_sv)
Compares the strings in two SVs. Returns -1, 0, or 1 indicating whether the
string in sv1
is less than, equal to, or greater than the string in
sv2
. Is UTF-8 and 'use bytes'
aware, handles get magic, and will
coerce its args to strings if necessary. See also sv_cmp_locale.
- I32 sv_cmp(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2)
Compares the strings in two SVs. Returns -1, 0, or 1 indicating whether the
string in sv1
is less than, equal to, or greater than the string in
sv2
. Is UTF-8 and 'use bytes'
aware and will coerce its args to strings
if necessary. If the flags has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, it handles get magic. See
also sv_cmp_locale_flags.
- I32 sv_cmp_flags(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2,
- const U32 flags)
Compares the strings in two SVs in a locale-aware manner. Is UTF-8 and
'use bytes'
aware, handles get magic, and will coerce its args to strings
if necessary. See also sv_cmp.
- I32 sv_cmp_locale(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2)
Compares the strings in two SVs in a locale-aware manner. Is UTF-8 and
'use bytes'
aware and will coerce its args to strings if necessary. If
the flags contain SV_GMAGIC
, it handles get magic. See also
sv_cmp_flags.
- I32 sv_cmp_locale_flags(SV *const sv1,
- SV *const sv2,
- const U32 flags)
This calls sv_collxfrm_flags
with the SV_GMAGIC flag. See
sv_collxfrm_flags.
- char* sv_collxfrm(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const nxp)
Add Collate Transform magic to an SV if it doesn't already have it. If the
flags contain SV_GMAGIC
, it handles get-magic.
Any scalar variable may carry PERL_MAGIC_collxfrm
magic that contains the
scalar data of the variable, but transformed to such a format that a normal
memory comparison can be used to compare the data according to the locale
settings.
- char* sv_collxfrm_flags(SV *const sv,
- STRLEN *const nxp,
- I32 const flags)
Copies a stringified representation of the source SV into the
destination SV. Automatically performs any necessary mg_get
and
coercion of numeric values into strings. Guaranteed to preserve
UTF8
flag even from overloaded objects. Similar in nature to
sv_2pv[_flags]
but operates directly on an SV instead of just the
string. Mostly uses sv_2pv_flags
to do its work, except when that
would lose the UTF-8'ness of the PV.
- void sv_copypv(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv)
Implementation of sv_copypv
and sv_copypv_nomg
. Calls get magic iff flags
has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set.
- void sv_copypv_flags(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv,
- const I32 flags)
Like sv_copypv
, but doesn't invoke get magic first.
- void sv_copypv_nomg(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv)
Auto-decrement of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary. Handles 'get' magic and operator overloading.
- void sv_dec(SV *const sv)
Auto-decrement of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary. Handles operator overloading. Skips handling 'get' magic.
- void sv_dec_nomg(SV *const sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the strings in the two SVs are
identical. Is UTF-8 and 'use bytes'
aware, handles get magic, and will
coerce its args to strings if necessary.
- I32 sv_eq(SV* sv1, SV* sv2)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the strings in the two SVs are
identical. Is UTF-8 and 'use bytes'
aware and coerces its args to strings
if necessary. If the flags has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, it handles get-magic, too.
- I32 sv_eq_flags(SV* sv1, SV* sv2, const U32 flags)
Undo various types of fakery on an SV, where fakery means
"more than" a string: if the PV is a shared string, make
a private copy; if we're a ref, stop refing; if we're a glob, downgrade to
an xpvmg
; if we're a copy-on-write scalar, this is the on-write time when
we do the copy, and is also used locally; if this is a
vstring, drop the vstring magic. If SV_COW_DROP_PV
is set
then a copy-on-write scalar drops its PV buffer (if any) and becomes
SvPOK_off
rather than making a copy. (Used where this
scalar is about to be set to some other value.) In addition,
the flags
parameter gets passed to sv_unref_flags()
when unreffing. sv_force_normal
calls this function
with flags set to 0.
This function is expected to be used to signal to perl that this SV is about to be written to, and any extra book-keeping needs to be taken care of. Hence, it croaks on read-only values.
- void sv_force_normal_flags(SV *const sv,
- const U32 flags)
Decrement an SV's reference count, and if it drops to zero, call
sv_clear
to invoke destructors and free up any memory used by
the body; finally, deallocating the SV's head itself.
Normally called via a wrapper macro SvREFCNT_dec
.
- void sv_free(SV *const sv)
Get a line from the filehandle and store it into the SV, optionally
appending to the currently-stored string. If append
is not 0, the
line is appended to the SV instead of overwriting it. append
should
be set to the byte offset that the appended string should start at
in the SV (typically, SvCUR(sv)
is a suitable choice).
- char* sv_gets(SV *const sv, PerlIO *const fp,
- I32 append)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
If sv
is the target of a weak reference then it returns the back
references structure associated with the sv; otherwise return NULL
.
When returning a non-null result the type of the return is relevant. If it is an AV then the elements of the AV are the weak reference RVs which point at this item. If it is any other type then the item itself is the weak reference.
See also Perl_sv_add_backref()
, Perl_sv_del_backref()
,
Perl_sv_kill_backrefs()
- SV* sv_get_backrefs(SV *const sv)
Expands the character buffer in the SV. If necessary, uses sv_unref
and
upgrades the SV to SVt_PV
. Returns a pointer to the character buffer.
Use the SvGROW
wrapper instead.
- char* sv_grow(SV *const sv, STRLEN newlen)
Auto-increment of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary. Handles 'get' magic and operator overloading.
- void sv_inc(SV *const sv)
Auto-increment of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary. Handles operator overloading. Skips handling 'get' magic.
- void sv_inc_nomg(SV *const sv)
Inserts a string at the specified offset/length within the SV. Similar to
the Perl substr() function. Handles get magic.
- void sv_insert(SV *const bigstr, const STRLEN offset,
- const STRLEN len,
- const char *const little,
- const STRLEN littlelen)
Same as sv_insert
, but the extra flags
are passed to the
SvPV_force_flags
that applies to bigstr
.
- void sv_insert_flags(SV *const bigstr,
- const STRLEN offset,
- const STRLEN len,
- const char *little,
- const STRLEN littlelen,
- const U32 flags)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is blessed into the specified
class. This does not check for subtypes; use sv_derived_from
to verify
an inheritance relationship.
- int sv_isa(SV* sv, const char *const name)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is an RV pointing to a blessed object. If the SV is not an RV, or if the object is not blessed, then this will return false.
- int sv_isobject(SV* sv)
Returns the length of the string in the SV. Handles magic and type
coercion and sets the UTF8 flag appropriately. See also SvCUR, which
gives raw access to the xpv_cur
slot.
- STRLEN sv_len(SV *const sv)
Returns the number of characters in the string in an SV, counting wide UTF-8 bytes as a single character. Handles magic and type coercion.
- STRLEN sv_len_utf8(SV *const sv)
Adds magic to an SV. First upgrades sv
to type SVt_PVMG
if
necessary, then adds a new magic item of type how
to the head of the
magic list.
See sv_magicext (which sv_magic
now calls) for a description of the
handling of the name
and namlen
arguments.
You need to use sv_magicext
to add magic to SvREADONLY
SVs and also
to add more than one instance of the same how
.
- void sv_magic(SV *const sv, SV *const obj,
- const int how, const char *const name,
- const I32 namlen)
Adds magic to an SV, upgrading it if necessary. Applies the
supplied vtable
and returns a pointer to the magic added.
Note that sv_magicext
will allow things that sv_magic
will not.
In particular, you can add magic to SvREADONLY
SVs, and add more than
one instance of the same how
.
If namlen
is greater than zero then a savepvn
copy of name
is
stored, if namlen
is zero then name
is stored as-is and - as another
special case - if (name && namlen == HEf_SVKEY)
then name
is assumed
to contain an SV* and is stored as-is with its REFCNT
incremented.
(This is now used as a subroutine by sv_magic
.)
- MAGIC * sv_magicext(SV *const sv, SV *const obj,
- const int how,
- const MGVTBL *const vtbl,
- const char *const name,
- const I32 namlen)
Creates a new SV which is a copy of the original SV (using sv_setsv
).
The new SV is marked as mortal. It will be destroyed "soon", either by an
explicit call to FREETMPS
, or by an implicit call at places such as
statement boundaries. See also sv_newmortal and sv_2mortal.
- SV* sv_mortalcopy(SV *const oldsv)
Creates a new null SV which is mortal. The reference count of the SV is
set to 1. It will be destroyed "soon", either by an explicit call to
FREETMPS
, or by an implicit call at places such as statement boundaries.
See also sv_mortalcopy and sv_2mortal.
- SV* sv_newmortal()
Increment an SV's reference count. Use the SvREFCNT_inc()
wrapper
instead.
- SV* sv_newref(SV *const sv)
Converts the value pointed to by offsetp
from a count of bytes from the
start of the string, to a count of the equivalent number of UTF-8 chars.
Handles magic and type coercion.
Use sv_pos_b2u_flags
in preference, which correctly handles strings
longer than 2Gb.
- void sv_pos_b2u(SV *const sv, I32 *const offsetp)
Converts offset
from a count of bytes from the start of the string, to
a count of the equivalent number of UTF-8 chars. Handles type coercion.
flags
is passed to SvPV_flags
, and usually should be
SV_GMAGIC|SV_CONST_RETURN
to handle magic.
- STRLEN sv_pos_b2u_flags(SV *const sv,
- STRLEN const offset, U32 flags)
Converts the value pointed to by offsetp
from a count of UTF-8 chars from
the start of the string, to a count of the equivalent number of bytes; if
lenp
is non-zero, it does the same to lenp
, but this time starting from
the offset, rather than from the start of the string. Handles magic and
type coercion.
Use sv_pos_u2b_flags
in preference, which correctly handles strings longer
than 2Gb.
- void sv_pos_u2b(SV *const sv, I32 *const offsetp,
- I32 *const lenp)
Converts the offset from a count of UTF-8 chars from
the start of the string, to a count of the equivalent number of bytes; if
lenp
is non-zero, it does the same to lenp
, but this time starting from
offset
, rather than from the start
of the string. Handles type coercion.
flags
is passed to SvPV_flags
, and usually should be
SV_GMAGIC|SV_CONST_RETURN
to handle magic.
- STRLEN sv_pos_u2b_flags(SV *const sv, STRLEN uoffset,
- STRLEN *const lenp, U32 flags)
The backend for the SvPVbytex_force
macro. Always use the macro
instead.
- char* sv_pvbyten_force(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp)
Get a sensible string out of the SV somehow.
A private implementation of the SvPV_force
macro for compilers which
can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.
- char* sv_pvn_force(SV* sv, STRLEN* lp)
Get a sensible string out of the SV somehow.
If flags
has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, will mg_get
on sv
if
appropriate, else not. sv_pvn_force
and sv_pvn_force_nomg
are
implemented in terms of this function.
You normally want to use the various wrapper macros instead: see
SvPV_force and SvPV_force_nomg.
- char* sv_pvn_force_flags(SV *const sv,
- STRLEN *const lp,
- const I32 flags)
The backend for the SvPVutf8x_force
macro. Always use the macro
instead.
- char* sv_pvutf8n_force(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp)
Returns a SV describing what the SV passed in is a reference to.
dst can be a SV to be set to the description or NULL, in which case a mortal SV is returned.
If ob is true and the SV is blessed, the description is the class name, otherwise it is the type of the SV, "SCALAR", "ARRAY" etc.
- SV* sv_ref(SV *dst, const SV *const sv,
- const int ob)
Returns a string describing what the SV is a reference to.
If ob is true and the SV is blessed, the string is the class name, otherwise it is the type of the SV, "SCALAR", "ARRAY" etc.
- const char* sv_reftype(const SV *const sv, const int ob)
Make the first argument a copy of the second, then delete the original.
The target SV physically takes over ownership of the body of the source SV
and inherits its flags; however, the target keeps any magic it owns,
and any magic in the source is discarded.
Note that this is a rather specialist SV copying operation; most of the
time you'll want to use sv_setsv
or one of its many macro front-ends.
- void sv_replace(SV *const sv, SV *const nsv)
Underlying implementation for the reset Perl function.
Note that the perl-level function is vaguely deprecated.
- void sv_reset(const char* s, HV *const stash)
Weaken a reference: set the SvWEAKREF
flag on this RV; give the
referred-to SV PERL_MAGIC_backref
magic if it hasn't already; and
push a back-reference to this RV onto the array of backreferences
associated with that magic. If the RV is magical, set magic will be
called after the RV is cleared.
- SV* sv_rvweaken(SV *const sv)
Copies an integer into the given SV, upgrading first if necessary.
Does not handle 'set' magic. See also sv_setiv_mg.
- void sv_setiv(SV *const sv, const IV num)
Like sv_setiv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setiv_mg(SV *const sv, const IV i)
Copies a double into the given SV, upgrading first if necessary.
Does not handle 'set' magic. See also sv_setnv_mg.
- void sv_setnv(SV *const sv, const NV num)
Like sv_setnv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setnv_mg(SV *const sv, const NV num)
Copies a string into an SV. The string must be terminated with a NUL
character, and not contain embeded NUL
's.
Does not handle 'set' magic. See sv_setpv_mg.
- void sv_setpv(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
Works like sv_catpvf
but copies the text into the SV instead of
appending it. Does not handle 'set' magic. See sv_setpvf_mg.
- void sv_setpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
- ...)
Like sv_setpvf
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
- const char *const pat, ...)
Copies an integer into the given SV, also updating its string value.
Does not handle 'set' magic. See sv_setpviv_mg.
- void sv_setpviv(SV *const sv, const IV num)
Like sv_setpviv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setpviv_mg(SV *const sv, const IV iv)
Copies a string (possibly containing embedded NUL
characters) into an SV.
The len
parameter indicates the number of
bytes to be copied. If the ptr
argument is NULL the SV will become
undefined. Does not handle 'set' magic. See sv_setpvn_mg.
- void sv_setpvn(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr,
- const STRLEN len)
Like sv_setpvn
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setpvn_mg(SV *const sv,
- const char *const ptr,
- const STRLEN len)
Like sv_setpvn
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- void sv_setpvs(SV* sv, const char* s)
Like sv_setpvn_mg
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of a
string/length pair.
- void sv_setpvs_mg(SV* sv, const char* s)
Sets the SV to be a string of cur bytes length, with at least len bytes available. Ensures that there is a null byte at SvEND. Returns a char * pointer to the SvPV buffer.
- char * sv_setpv_bufsize(SV *const sv, const STRLEN cur,
- const STRLEN len)
Like sv_setpv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setpv_mg(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
Copies an integer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The rv
argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be modified to point to
the new SV. The classname
argument indicates the package for the
blessing. Set classname
to NULL
to avoid the blessing. The new SV
will have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
- SV* sv_setref_iv(SV *const rv,
- const char *const classname,
- const IV iv)
Copies a double into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The rv
argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be modified to point to
the new SV. The classname
argument indicates the package for the
blessing. Set classname
to NULL
to avoid the blessing. The new SV
will have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
- SV* sv_setref_nv(SV *const rv,
- const char *const classname,
- const NV nv)
Copies a pointer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The rv
argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be modified to point to
the new SV. If the pv
argument is NULL
, then PL_sv_undef
will be placed
into the SV. The classname
argument indicates the package for the
blessing. Set classname
to NULL
to avoid the blessing. The new SV
will have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
Do not use with other Perl types such as HV, AV, SV, CV, because those objects will become corrupted by the pointer copy process.
Note that sv_setref_pvn
copies the string while this copies the pointer.
- SV* sv_setref_pv(SV *const rv,
- const char *const classname,
- void *const pv)
Copies a string into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The length of the
string must be specified with n
. The rv
argument will be upgraded to
an RV. That RV will be modified to point to the new SV. The classname
argument indicates the package for the blessing. Set classname
to
NULL
to avoid the blessing. The new SV will have a reference count
of 1, and the RV will be returned.
Note that sv_setref_pv
copies the pointer while this copies the string.
- SV* sv_setref_pvn(SV *const rv,
- const char *const classname,
- const char *const pv,
- const STRLEN n)
Like sv_setref_pvn
, but takes a NUL
-terminated literal string instead of
a string/length pair.
- SV * sv_setref_pvs(const char* s)
Copies an unsigned integer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The rv
argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be modified to point to
the new SV. The classname
argument indicates the package for the
blessing. Set classname
to NULL
to avoid the blessing. The new SV
will have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
- SV* sv_setref_uv(SV *const rv,
- const char *const classname,
- const UV uv)
Copies the contents of the source SV ssv
into the destination SV
dsv
. The source SV may be destroyed if it is mortal, so don't use this
function if the source SV needs to be reused. Does not handle 'set' magic on
destination SV. Calls 'get' magic on source SV. Loosely speaking, it
performs a copy-by-value, obliterating any previous content of the
destination.
You probably want to use one of the assortment of wrappers, such as
SvSetSV
, SvSetSV_nosteal
, SvSetMagicSV
and
SvSetMagicSV_nosteal
.
- void sv_setsv(SV *dstr, SV *sstr)
Copies the contents of the source SV ssv
into the destination SV
dsv
. The source SV may be destroyed if it is mortal, so don't use this
function if the source SV needs to be reused. Does not handle 'set' magic.
Loosely speaking, it performs a copy-by-value, obliterating any previous
content of the destination.
If the flags
parameter has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, will mg_get
on
ssv
if appropriate, else not. If the flags
parameter has the SV_NOSTEAL
bit set then the
buffers of temps will not be stolen. sv_setsv
and sv_setsv_nomg
are implemented in terms of this function.
You probably want to use one of the assortment of wrappers, such as
SvSetSV
, SvSetSV_nosteal
, SvSetMagicSV
and
SvSetMagicSV_nosteal
.
This is the primary function for copying scalars, and most other copy-ish functions and macros use this underneath.
- void sv_setsv_flags(SV *dstr, SV *sstr,
- const I32 flags)
Like sv_setsv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setsv_mg(SV *const dstr, SV *const sstr)
Copies an unsigned integer into the given SV, upgrading first if necessary.
Does not handle 'set' magic. See also sv_setuv_mg.
- void sv_setuv(SV *const sv, const UV num)
Like sv_setuv
, but also handles 'set' magic.
- void sv_setuv_mg(SV *const sv, const UV u)
Equivalent to sv_setsv(sv, &PL_sv_undef)
, but more efficient.
Doesn't handle set magic.
The perl equivalent is $sv = undef;
. Note that it doesn't free any string
buffer, unlike undef $sv
.
Introduced in perl 5.26.0.
- void sv_set_undef(SV *sv)
Test an SV for taintedness. Use SvTAINTED
instead.
- bool sv_tainted(SV *const sv)
Returns true if the SV has a true value by Perl's rules.
Use the SvTRUE
macro instead, which may call sv_true()
or may
instead use an in-line version.
- I32 sv_true(SV *const sv)
Removes all magic of type type
from an SV.
Removes all magic of type type
with the specified vtbl
from an SV.
Unsets the RV status of the SV, and decrements the reference count of
whatever was being referenced by the RV. This can almost be thought of
as a reversal of newSVrv
. The cflags
argument can contain
SV_IMMEDIATE_UNREF
to force the reference count to be decremented
(otherwise the decrementing is conditional on the reference count being
different from one or the reference being a readonly SV).
See SvROK_off.
- void sv_unref_flags(SV *const ref, const U32 flags)
Untaint an SV. Use SvTAINTED_off
instead.
- void sv_untaint(SV *const sv)
Upgrade an SV to a more complex form. Generally adds a new body type to the
SV, then copies across as much information as possible from the old body.
It croaks if the SV is already in a more complex form than requested. You
generally want to use the SvUPGRADE
macro wrapper, which checks the type
before calling sv_upgrade
, and hence does not croak. See also
svtype.
- void sv_upgrade(SV *const sv, svtype new_type)
Tells an SV to use ptr
to find its string value. Normally the
string is stored inside the SV, but sv_usepvn allows the SV to use an
outside string. ptr
should point to memory that was allocated
by Newx . It must be
the start of a Newx
-ed block of memory, and not a pointer to the
middle of it (beware of OOK and copy-on-write),
and not be from a non-Newx
memory allocator like malloc
. The
string length, len
, must be supplied. By default this function
will Renew
(i.e. realloc, move) the memory pointed to by ptr
,
so that pointer should not be freed or used by the programmer after
giving it to sv_usepvn
, and neither should any pointers from "behind"
that pointer (e.g. ptr + 1) be used.
If flags & SV_SMAGIC
is true, will call SvSETMAGIC
. If
flags
& SV_HAS_TRAILING_NUL> is true, then ptr[len]
must be NUL
,
and the realloc
will be skipped (i.e. the buffer is actually at least 1 byte longer than
len
, and already meets the requirements for storing in SvPVX
).
- void sv_usepvn_flags(SV *const sv, char* ptr,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U32 flags)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
If the PV of the SV is an octet sequence in Perl's extended UTF-8
and contains a multiple-byte character, the SvUTF8
flag is turned on
so that it looks like a character. If the PV contains only single-byte
characters, the SvUTF8
flag stays off.
Scans PV for validity and returns FALSE if the PV is invalid UTF-8.
- bool sv_utf8_decode(SV *const sv)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Attempts to convert the PV of an SV from characters to bytes.
If the PV contains a character that cannot fit
in a byte, this conversion will fail;
in this case, either returns false or, if fail_ok
is not
true, croaks.
This is not a general purpose Unicode to byte encoding interface:
use the Encode
extension for that.
- bool sv_utf8_downgrade(SV *const sv,
- const bool fail_ok)
Converts the PV of an SV to UTF-8, but then turns the SvUTF8
flag off so that it looks like octets again.
- void sv_utf8_encode(SV *const sv)
Converts the PV of an SV to its UTF-8-encoded form.
Forces the SV to string form if it is not already.
Will mg_get
on sv
if appropriate.
Always sets the SvUTF8
flag to avoid future validity checks even
if the whole string is the same in UTF-8 as not.
Returns the number of bytes in the converted string
This is not a general purpose byte encoding to Unicode interface: use the Encode extension for that.
- STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade(SV *sv)
Converts the PV of an SV to its UTF-8-encoded form.
Forces the SV to string form if it is not already.
Always sets the SvUTF8 flag to avoid future validity checks even
if all the bytes are invariant in UTF-8.
If flags
has SV_GMAGIC
bit set,
will mg_get
on sv
if appropriate, else not.
If flags
has SV_FORCE_UTF8_UPGRADE
set, this function assumes that the PV
will expand when converted to UTF-8, and skips the extra work of checking for
that. Typically this flag is used by a routine that has already parsed the
string and found such characters, and passes this information on so that the
work doesn't have to be repeated.
Returns the number of bytes in the converted string.
This is not a general purpose byte encoding to Unicode interface: use the Encode extension for that.
- STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_flags(SV *const sv,
- const I32 flags)
Like sv_utf8_upgrade_flags
, but has an additional parameter extra
, which is
the number of unused bytes the string of sv
is guaranteed to have free after
it upon return. This allows the caller to reserve extra space that it intends
to fill, to avoid extra grows.
sv_utf8_upgrade
, sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg
, and sv_utf8_upgrade_flags
are implemented in terms of this function.
Returns the number of bytes in the converted string (not including the spares).
- STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_flags_grow(SV *const sv,
- const I32 flags,
- STRLEN extra)
Like sv_utf8_upgrade
, but doesn't do magic on sv
.
- STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg(SV *sv)
Processes its arguments like sv_catpvfn
called with a non-null C-style
variable argument list, and appends the formatted output
to an SV. Does not handle 'set' magic. See sv_vcatpvf_mg.
Usually used via its frontend sv_catpvf
.
- void sv_vcatpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
- va_list *const args)
- void sv_vcatpvfn(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
- const STRLEN patlen,
- va_list *const args,
- SV **const svargs, const I32 svmax,
- bool *const maybe_tainted)
Processes its arguments like vsprintf
and appends the formatted output
to an SV. Uses an array of SVs if the C-style variable argument list is
missing (NULL
). Argument reordering (using format specifiers like %2$d
or %*2$d
) is supported only when using an array of SVs; using a C-style
va_list
argument list with a format string that uses argument reordering
will yield an exception.
When running with taint checks enabled, indicates via
maybe_tainted
if results are untrustworthy (often due to the use of
locales).
If called as sv_vcatpvfn
or flags has the SV_GMAGIC
bit set, calls get magic.
Usually used via one of its frontends sv_vcatpvf
and sv_vcatpvf_mg
.
- void sv_vcatpvfn_flags(SV *const sv,
- const char *const pat,
- const STRLEN patlen,
- va_list *const args,
- SV **const svargs,
- const I32 svmax,
- bool *const maybe_tainted,
- const U32 flags)
Like sv_vcatpvf
, but also handles 'set' magic.
Usually used via its frontend sv_catpvf_mg
.
- void sv_vcatpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
- const char *const pat,
- va_list *const args)
Works like sv_vcatpvf
but copies the text into the SV instead of
appending it. Does not handle 'set' magic. See sv_vsetpvf_mg.
Usually used via its frontend sv_setpvf
.
- void sv_vsetpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
- va_list *const args)
Works like sv_vcatpvfn
but copies the text into the SV instead of
appending it.
Usually used via one of its frontends sv_vsetpvf
and sv_vsetpvf_mg
.
- void sv_vsetpvfn(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
- const STRLEN patlen,
- va_list *const args,
- SV **const svargs, const I32 svmax,
- bool *const maybe_tainted)
Like sv_vsetpvf
, but also handles 'set' magic.
Usually used via its frontend sv_setpvf_mg
.
- void sv_vsetpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
- const char *const pat,
- va_list *const args)
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for arrays. See svtype.
Type flag for subroutines. See svtype.
Type flag for formats. See svtype.
Type flag for typeglobs. See svtype.
Type flag for hashes. See svtype.
Type flag for I/O objects. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for scalars. See svtype.
Type flag for regular expressions. See svtype.
An enum of flags for Perl types. These are found in the file sv.h
in the svtype
enum. Test these flags with the SvTYPE
macro.
The types are:
- SVt_NULL
- SVt_IV
- SVt_NV
- SVt_RV
- SVt_PV
- SVt_PVIV
- SVt_PVNV
- SVt_PVMG
- SVt_INVLIST
- SVt_REGEXP
- SVt_PVGV
- SVt_PVLV
- SVt_PVAV
- SVt_PVHV
- SVt_PVCV
- SVt_PVFM
- SVt_PVIO
These are most easily explained from the bottom up.
SVt_PVIO
is for I/O objects, SVt_PVFM
for formats, SVt_PVCV
for
subroutines, SVt_PVHV
for hashes and SVt_PVAV
for arrays.
All the others are scalar types, that is, things that can be bound to a
$
variable. For these, the internal types are mostly orthogonal to
types in the Perl language.
Hence, checking SvTYPE(sv) < SVt_PVAV
is the best way to see whether
something is a scalar.
SVt_PVGV
represents a typeglob. If !SvFAKE(sv)
, then it is a real,
incoercible typeglob. If SvFAKE(sv)
, then it is a scalar to which a
typeglob has been assigned. Assigning to it again will stop it from being
a typeglob. SVt_PVLV
represents a scalar that delegates to another scalar
behind the scenes. It is used, e.g., for the return value of substr and
for tied hash and array elements. It can hold any scalar value, including
a typeglob. SVt_REGEXP
is for regular
expressions. SVt_INVLIST
is for Perl
core internal use only.
SVt_PVMG
represents a "normal" scalar (not a typeglob, regular expression,
or delegate). Since most scalars do not need all the internal fields of a
PVMG, we save memory by allocating smaller structs when possible. All the
other types are just simpler forms of SVt_PVMG
, with fewer internal fields.
SVt_NULL
can only hold undef. SVt_IV
can hold undef, an integer, or a
reference. (SVt_RV
is an alias for SVt_IV
, which exists for backward
compatibility.) SVt_NV
can hold any of those or a double. SVt_PV
can only
hold undef or a string. SVt_PVIV
is a superset of SVt_PV
and SVt_IV
.
SVt_PVNV
is similar. SVt_PVMG
can hold anything SVt_PVNV
can hold, but it
can, but does not have to, be blessed or magical.
Returns a true SV if b
is a true value, or a false SV if b
is 0.
See also PL_sv_yes and PL_sv_no.
- SV * boolSV(bool b)
A specialised variant of croak()
for emitting the usage message for xsubs
- croak_xs_usage(cv, "eee_yow");
works out the package name and subroutine name from cv
, and then calls
croak()
. Hence if cv
is &ouch::awk
, it would call croak
as:
- Perl_croak(aTHX_ "Usage: %" SVf "::%" SVf "(%s)", "ouch" "awk",
- "eee_yow");
- void croak_xs_usage(const CV *const cv,
- const char *const params)
Returns the SV of the specified Perl scalar. flags
are passed to
gv_fetchpv
. If GV_ADD
is set and the
Perl variable does not exist then it will be created. If flags
is zero
and the variable does not exist then NULL is returned.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
- SV* get_sv(const char *name, I32 flags)
Creates an RV wrapper for an SV. The reference count for the original SV is incremented.
- SV* newRV_inc(SV* sv)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Creates a new SV containing the pad name.
- SV* newSVpadname(PADNAME *pn)
Creates a new SV and copies a string (which may contain NUL
(\0
)
characters) into it. If utf8
is true, calls
SvUTF8_on
on the new SV. Implemented as a wrapper around newSVpvn_flags
.
- SV* newSVpvn_utf8(NULLOK const char* s, STRLEN len,
- U32 utf8)
Like sv_catpvn
but doesn't process magic.
- void sv_catpvn_nomg(SV* sv, const char* ptr,
- STRLEN len)
Like sv_catpv
but doesn't process magic.
- void sv_catpv_nomg(SV* sv, const char* ptr)
Like sv_catsv
but doesn't process magic.
- void sv_catsv_nomg(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
Returns the length of the string which is in the SV. See SvLEN.
- STRLEN SvCUR(SV* sv)
Set the current length of the string which is in the SV. See SvCUR
and SvIV_set
>.
- void SvCUR_set(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Exactly like sv_derived_from_pv, but doesn't take a flags
parameter.
- bool sv_derived_from(SV* sv, const char *const name)
Exactly like sv_derived_from_pvn, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
- bool sv_derived_from_pv(SV* sv,
- const char *const name,
- U32 flags)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is derived from the specified class
at the C level. To check derivation at the Perl level, call isa()
as a
normal Perl method.
Currently, the only significant value for flags
is SVf_UTF8.
- bool sv_derived_from_pvn(SV* sv,
- const char *const name,
- const STRLEN len, U32 flags)
Exactly like sv_derived_from_pvn, but takes the name string in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
- bool sv_derived_from_sv(SV* sv, SV *namesv,
- U32 flags)
Like sv_does_pv, but doesn't take a flags
parameter.
- bool sv_does(SV* sv, const char *const name)
Like sv_does_sv, but takes a nul-terminated string instead of an SV.
- bool sv_does_pv(SV* sv, const char *const name,
- U32 flags)
Like sv_does_sv, but takes a string/length pair instead of an SV.
- bool sv_does_pvn(SV* sv, const char *const name,
- const STRLEN len, U32 flags)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV performs a specific, named role. The SV can be a Perl object or the name of a Perl class.
- bool sv_does_sv(SV* sv, SV* namesv, U32 flags)
Returns a pointer to the spot just after the last character in
the string which is in the SV, where there is usually a trailing
NUL
character (even though Perl scalars do not strictly require it).
See SvCUR. Access the character as *(SvEND(sv))
.
Warning: If SvCUR
is equal to SvLEN
, then SvEND
points to
unallocated memory.
- char* SvEND(SV* sv)
Returns true if the SV has get magic or overloading. If either is true then the scalar is active data, and has the potential to return a new value every time it is accessed. Hence you must be careful to only read it once per user logical operation and work with that returned value. If neither is true then the scalar's value cannot change unless written to.
- U32 SvGAMAGIC(SV* sv)
Expands the character buffer in the SV so that it has room for the
indicated number of bytes (remember to reserve space for an extra trailing
NUL
character). Calls sv_grow
to perform the expansion if necessary.
Returns a pointer to the character
buffer. SV must be of type >= SVt_PV
. One
alternative is to call sv_grow
if you are not sure of the type of SV.
You might mistakenly think that len
is the number of bytes to add to the
existing size, but instead it is the total size sv
should be.
- char * SvGROW(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains an integer.
- U32 SvIOK(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains a signed integer.
- bool SvIOK_notUV(SV* sv)
Unsets the IV status of an SV.
- void SvIOK_off(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is an integer.
- void SvIOK_on(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is an integer and disables all other OK
bits.
- void SvIOK_only(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is an unsigned integer and disables all other OK
bits.
- void SvIOK_only_UV(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains an integer. Checks
the private setting. Use SvIOK
instead.
- U32 SvIOKp(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains an integer that must be
interpreted as unsigned. A non-negative integer whose value is within the
range of both an IV and a UV may be be flagged as either SvUOK
or SVIOK
.
- bool SvIOK_UV(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV is Copy-On-Write (either shared hash key scalars, or full Copy On Write scalars if 5.9.0 is configured for COW).
- U32 SvIsCOW(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is Copy-On-Write shared hash key scalar.
- bool SvIsCOW_shared_hash(SV* sv)
Coerces the given SV to IV and returns it. The returned value in many
circumstances will get stored in sv
's IV slot, but not in all cases. (Use
sv_setiv to make sure it does).
See SvIVx for a version which guarantees to evaluate sv
only once.
- IV SvIV(SV* sv)
Like SvIV
but doesn't process magic.
- IV SvIV_nomg(SV* sv)
Set the value of the IV pointer in sv to val. It is possible to perform
the same function of this macro with an lvalue assignment to SvIVX
.
With future Perls, however, it will be more efficient to use
SvIV_set
instead of the lvalue assignment to SvIVX
.
- void SvIV_set(SV* sv, IV val)
Returns the raw value in the SV's IV slot, without checks or conversions.
Only use when you are sure SvIOK
is true. See also SvIV.
- IV SvIVX(SV* sv)
Coerces the given SV to IV and returns it. The returned value in many
circumstances will get stored in sv
's IV slot, but not in all cases. (Use
sv_setiv to make sure it does).
This form guarantees to evaluate sv
only once. Only use this if sv
is an
expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient SvIV
.
- IV SvIVx(SV* sv)
Returns the size of the string buffer in the SV, not including any part
attributable to SvOOK
. See SvCUR.
- STRLEN SvLEN(SV* sv)
Set the size of the string buffer for the SV. See SvLEN.
- void SvLEN_set(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Set the value of the MAGIC pointer in sv
to val. See SvIV_set.
- void SvMAGIC_set(SV* sv, MAGIC* val)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a number, integer or double.
- U32 SvNIOK(SV* sv)
Unsets the NV/IV status of an SV.
- void SvNIOK_off(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a number, integer or
double. Checks the private setting. Use SvNIOK
instead.
- U32 SvNIOKp(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a double.
- U32 SvNOK(SV* sv)
Unsets the NV status of an SV.
- void SvNOK_off(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is a double.
- void SvNOK_on(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is a double and disables all other OK bits.
- void SvNOK_only(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a double. Checks the
private setting. Use SvNOK
instead.
- U32 SvNOKp(SV* sv)
Coerces the given SV to NV and returns it. The returned value in many
circumstances will get stored in sv
's NV slot, but not in all cases. (Use
sv_setnv to make sure it does).
See SvNVx for a version which guarantees to evaluate sv
only once.
- NV SvNV(SV* sv)
Like SvNV
but doesn't process magic.
- NV SvNV_nomg(SV* sv)
Set the value of the NV pointer in sv
to val. See SvIV_set.
- void SvNV_set(SV* sv, NV val)
Returns the raw value in the SV's NV slot, without checks or conversions.
Only use when you are sure SvNOK
is true. See also SvNV.
- NV SvNVX(SV* sv)
Coerces the given SV to NV and returns it. The returned value in many
circumstances will get stored in sv
's NV slot, but not in all cases. (Use
sv_setnv to make sure it does).
This form guarantees to evaluate sv
only once. Only use this if sv
is an
expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient SvNV
.
- NV SvNVx(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the value is defined. This is only meaningful for scalars.
- U32 SvOK(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 indicating whether the pointer to the string buffer is offset.
This hack is used internally to speed up removal of characters from the
beginning of a SvPV
. When SvOOK
is true, then the start of the
allocated string buffer is actually SvOOK_offset()
bytes before SvPVX
.
This offset used to be stored in SvIVX
, but is now stored within the spare
part of the buffer.
- U32 SvOOK(SV* sv)
Reads into len
the offset from SvPVX
back to the true start of the
allocated buffer, which will be non-zero if sv_chop
has been used to
efficiently remove characters from start of the buffer. Implemented as a
macro, which takes the address of len
, which must be of type STRLEN
.
Evaluates sv
more than once. Sets len
to 0 if SvOOK(sv)
is false.
- void SvOOK_offset(NN SV*sv, STRLEN len)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a character string.
- U32 SvPOK(SV* sv)
Unsets the PV status of an SV.
- void SvPOK_off(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is a string.
- void SvPOK_on(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is a string and disables all other OK
bits.
Will also turn off the UTF-8 status.
- void SvPOK_only(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is a string and disables all other OK
bits,
and leaves the UTF-8 status as it was.
- void SvPOK_only_UTF8(SV* sv)
Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a character string.
Checks the private setting. Use SvPOK
instead.
- U32 SvPOKp(SV* sv)
Returns a pointer to the string in the SV, or a stringified form of
the SV if the SV does not contain a string. The SV may cache the
stringified version becoming SvPOK
. Handles 'get' magic. The
len
variable will be set to the length of the string (this is a macro, so
don't use &len
). See also SvPVx for a version which guarantees to
evaluate sv
only once.
Note that there is no guarantee that the return value of SvPV()
is
equal to SvPVX(sv)
, or that SvPVX(sv)
contains valid data, or that
successive calls to SvPV(sv)
will return the same pointer value each
time. This is due to the way that things like overloading and
Copy-On-Write are handled. In these cases, the return value may point to
a temporary buffer or similar. If you absolutely need the SvPVX
field to
be valid (for example, if you intend to write to it), then see
SvPV_force.
- char* SvPV(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV
, but converts sv
to byte representation first if necessary.
- char* SvPVbyte(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_force
, but converts sv
to byte representation first if necessary.
- char* SvPVbyte_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_nolen
, but converts sv
to byte representation first if necessary.
- char* SvPVbyte_nolen(SV* sv)
Like SvPV
, but converts sv
to byte representation first if necessary.
Guarantees to evaluate sv
only once; use the more efficient SvPVbyte
otherwise.
- char* SvPVbytex(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_force
, but converts sv
to byte representation first if necessary.
Guarantees to evaluate sv
only once; use the more efficient SvPVbyte_force
otherwise.
- char* SvPVbytex_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Ensures that sv is a SVt_PV and that its SvCUR is 0, and that it is properly null terminated. Equivalent to sv_setpvs(""), but more efficient.
- char * SvPVCLEAR(SV* sv)
Like SvPV
but will force the SV into containing a string (SvPOK
), and
only a string (SvPOK_only
), by hook or by crook. You need force if you are
going to update the SvPVX
directly. Processes get magic.
Note that coercing an arbitrary scalar into a plain PV will potentially
strip useful data from it. For example if the SV was SvROK
, then the
referent will have its reference count decremented, and the SV itself may
be converted to an SvPOK
scalar with a string buffer containing a value
such as "ARRAY(0x1234)"
.
- char* SvPV_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_force
, but doesn't process get magic.
- char* SvPV_force_nomg(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV
but doesn't set a length variable.
- char* SvPV_nolen(SV* sv)
Like SvPV
but doesn't process magic.
- char* SvPV_nomg(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_nolen
but doesn't process magic.
- char* SvPV_nomg_nolen(SV* sv)
This is probably not what you want to use, you probably wanted sv_usepvn_flags or sv_setpvn or sv_setpvs.
Set the value of the PV pointer in sv
to the Perl allocated
NUL
-terminated string val
. See also SvIV_set.
Remember to free the previous PV buffer. There are many things to check.
Beware that the existing pointer may be involved in copy-on-write or other
mischief, so do SvOOK_off(sv)
and use sv_force_normal
or
SvPV_force
(or check the SvIsCOW
flag) first to make sure this
modification is safe. Then finally, if it is not a COW, call SvPV_free
to
free the previous PV buffer.
- void SvPV_set(SV* sv, char* val)
Like SvPV
, but converts sv
to UTF-8 first if necessary.
- char* SvPVutf8(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV
, but converts sv
to UTF-8 first if necessary.
Guarantees to evaluate sv
only once; use the more efficient SvPVutf8
otherwise.
- char* SvPVutf8x(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_force
, but converts sv
to UTF-8 first if necessary.
Guarantees to evaluate sv
only once; use the more efficient SvPVutf8_force
otherwise.
- char* SvPVutf8x_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_force
, but converts sv
to UTF-8 first if necessary.
- char* SvPVutf8_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Like SvPV_nolen
, but converts sv
to UTF-8 first if necessary.
- char* SvPVutf8_nolen(SV* sv)
Returns a pointer to the physical string in the SV. The SV must contain a
string. Prior to 5.9.3 it is not safe
to execute this macro unless the SV's
type >= SVt_PV
.
This is also used to store the name of an autoloaded subroutine in an XS AUTOLOAD routine. See Autoloading with XSUBs in perlguts.
- char* SvPVX(SV* sv)
A version of SvPV
which guarantees to evaluate sv
only once.
Only use this if sv
is an expression with side effects, otherwise use the
more efficient SvPV
.
- char* SvPVx(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
Returns true if the argument is readonly, otherwise returns false. Exposed to to perl code via Internals::SvREADONLY().
- U32 SvREADONLY(SV* sv)
Mark an object as not-readonly. Exactly what this mean depends on the object type. Exposed to perl code via Internals::SvREADONLY().
- U32 SvREADONLY_off(SV* sv)
Mark an object as readonly. Exactly what this means depends on the object type. Exposed to perl code via Internals::SvREADONLY().
- U32 SvREADONLY_on(SV* sv)
Returns the value of the object's reference count. Exposed to perl code via Internals::SvREFCNT().
- U32 SvREFCNT(SV* sv)
Decrements the reference count of the given SV. sv
may be NULL
.
- void SvREFCNT_dec(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_dec
, but can only be used if you know sv
is not NULL
. Since we don't have to check the NULLness, it's faster
and smaller.
- void SvREFCNT_dec_NN(SV* sv)
Increments the reference count of the given SV, returning the SV.
All of the following SvREFCNT_inc
* macros are optimized versions of
SvREFCNT_inc
, and can be replaced with SvREFCNT_inc
.
- SV* SvREFCNT_inc(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc
, but can only be used if you know sv
is not NULL
. Since we don't have to check the NULLness, it's faster
and smaller.
- SV* SvREFCNT_inc_NN(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc
, but can only be used with expressions without side
effects. Since we don't have to store a temporary value, it's faster.
- SV* SvREFCNT_inc_simple(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc_simple
, but can only be used if you know sv
is not NULL
. Since we don't have to check the NULLness, it's faster
and smaller.
- SV* SvREFCNT_inc_simple_NN(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc_simple
, but can only be used if you don't need the
return value. The macro doesn't need to return a meaningful value.
- void SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc
, but can only be used if you don't need the return
value, and you know that sv
is not NULL
. The macro doesn't need
to return a meaningful value, or check for NULLness, so it's smaller
and faster.
- void SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void_NN(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc
, but can only be used if you don't need the
return value. The macro doesn't need to return a meaningful value.
- void SvREFCNT_inc_void(SV* sv)
Same as SvREFCNT_inc
, but can only be used if you don't need the return
value, and you know that sv
is not NULL
. The macro doesn't need
to return a meaningful value, or check for NULLness, so it's smaller
and faster.
- void SvREFCNT_inc_void_NN(SV* sv)
Dump the contents of all SVs not yet freed (debugging aid).
- void sv_report_used()
Tests if the SV is an RV.
- U32 SvROK(SV* sv)
Unsets the RV status of an SV.
- void SvROK_off(SV* sv)
Tells an SV that it is an RV.
- void SvROK_on(SV* sv)
Dereferences an RV to return the SV.
- SV* SvRV(SV* sv)
Set the value of the RV pointer in sv
to val. See SvIV_set.
- void SvRV_set(SV* sv, SV* val)
Like sv_setsv
but doesn't process magic.
- void sv_setsv_nomg(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
Returns the stash of the SV.
- HV* SvSTASH(SV* sv)
Set the value of the STASH pointer in sv
to val. See SvIV_set.
- void SvSTASH_set(SV* sv, HV* val)
Taints an SV if tainting is enabled, and if some input to the current
expression is tainted--usually a variable, but possibly also implicit
inputs such as locale settings. SvTAINT
propagates that taintedness to
the outputs of an expression in a pessimistic fashion; i.e., without paying
attention to precisely which outputs are influenced by which inputs.
- void SvTAINT(SV* sv)
Checks to see if an SV is tainted. Returns TRUE if it is, FALSE if not.
- bool SvTAINTED(SV* sv)
Untaints an SV. Be very careful with this routine, as it short-circuits some of Perl's fundamental security features. XS module authors should not use this function unless they fully understand all the implications of unconditionally untainting the value. Untainting should be done in the standard perl fashion, via a carefully crafted regexp, rather than directly untainting variables.
- void SvTAINTED_off(SV* sv)
Marks an SV as tainted if tainting is enabled.
- void SvTAINTED_on(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether Perl would evaluate the SV as true or
false. See SvOK for a defined/undefined test. Handles 'get' magic
unless the scalar is already SvPOK
, SvIOK
or SvNOK
(the public, not the
private flags).
- bool SvTRUE(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether Perl would evaluate the SV as true or
false. See SvOK for a defined/undefined test. Does not handle 'get' magic.
- bool SvTRUE_nomg(SV* sv)
Returns the type of the SV. See svtype.
- svtype SvTYPE(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains an integer that must be
interpreted as unsigned. A non-negative integer whose value is within the
range of both an IV and a UV may be be flagged as either SvUOK
or SVIOK
.
- bool SvUOK(SV* sv)
Used to upgrade an SV to a more complex form. Uses sv_upgrade
to
perform the upgrade if necessary. See svtype.
- void SvUPGRADE(SV* sv, svtype type)
Returns a U32 value indicating the UTF-8 status of an SV. If things are set-up
properly, this indicates whether or not the SV contains UTF-8 encoded data.
You should use this after a call to SvPV()
or one of its variants, in
case any call to string overloading updates the internal flag.
If you want to take into account the bytes pragma, use DO_UTF8
instead.
- U32 SvUTF8(SV* sv)
Like sv_utf8_upgrade
, but doesn't do magic on sv
.
- STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg(NN SV *sv)
Unsets the UTF-8 status of an SV (the data is not changed, just the flag). Do not use frivolously.
- void SvUTF8_off(SV *sv)
Turn on the UTF-8 status of an SV (the data is not changed, just the flag). Do not use frivolously.
- void SvUTF8_on(SV *sv)
Coerces the given SV to UV and returns it. The returned value in many
circumstances will get stored in sv
's UV slot, but not in all cases. (Use
sv_setuv to make sure it does).
See SvUVx for a version which guarantees to evaluate sv
only once.
- UV SvUV(SV* sv)
Like SvUV
but doesn't process magic.
- UV SvUV_nomg(SV* sv)
Set the value of the UV pointer in sv
to val. See SvIV_set.
- void SvUV_set(SV* sv, UV val)
Returns the raw value in the SV's UV slot, without checks or conversions.
Only use when you are sure SvIOK
is true. See also SvUV.
- UV SvUVX(SV* sv)
Coerces the given SV to UV and returns it. The returned value in many
circumstances will get stored in sv
's UV slot, but not in all cases. (Use
sv_setuv to make sure it does).
This form guarantees to evaluate sv
only once. Only use this if sv
is an
expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient SvUV
.
- UV SvUVx(SV* sv)
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains a v-string.
- bool SvVOK(SV* sv)
Unicode Support in perlguts has an introduction to this API.
See also Character classification, and Character case changing. Various functions outside this section also work specially with Unicode. Search for the string "utf8" in this document.
This is a macro that evaluates to a string constant of the UTF-8 bytes that
define the Unicode BYTE ORDER MARK (U+FEFF) for the platform that perl
is compiled on. This allows code to use a mnemonic for this character that
works on both ASCII and EBCDIC platforms.
sizeof(BOM_UTF8) - 1
can be used to get its length in
bytes.
Compares the sequence of characters (stored as octets) in b
, blen
with the
sequence of characters (stored as UTF-8)
in u
, ulen
. Returns 0 if they are
equal, -1 or -2 if the first string is less than the second string, +1 or +2
if the first string is greater than the second string.
-1 or +1 is returned if the shorter string was identical to the start of the longer string. -2 or +2 is returned if there was a difference between characters within the strings.
- int bytes_cmp_utf8(const U8 *b, STRLEN blen,
- const U8 *u, STRLEN ulen)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Converts a string s of length len
from UTF-8 into native byte encoding.
Unlike utf8_to_bytes but like bytes_to_utf8, returns a pointer to
the newly-created string, and updates len
to contain the new
length. Returns the original string if no conversion occurs, len
is unchanged. Do nothing if is_utf8
points to 0. Sets is_utf8
to
0 if s is converted or consisted entirely of characters that are invariant
in UTF-8 (i.e., US-ASCII on non-EBCDIC machines).
- U8* bytes_from_utf8(const U8 *s, STRLEN *len,
- bool *is_utf8)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Converts a string s of length len
bytes from the native encoding into
UTF-8.
Returns a pointer to the newly-created string, and sets len
to
reflect the new length in bytes.
A NUL
character will be written after the end of the string.
If you want to convert to UTF-8 from encodings other than the native (Latin1 or EBCDIC), see sv_recode_to_utf8().
- U8* bytes_to_utf8(const U8 *s, STRLEN *len)
Returns a bool giving whether or not the PV in sv
is to be treated as being
encoded in UTF-8.
You should use this after a call to SvPV()
or one of its variants, in
case any call to string overloading updates the internal UTF-8 encoding flag.
- bool DO_UTF8(SV* sv)
Returns true if the leading portions of the strings s1
and s2
(either or both
of which may be in UTF-8) are the same case-insensitively; false otherwise.
How far into the strings to compare is determined by other input parameters.
If u1
is true, the string s1
is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded Unicode;
otherwise it is assumed to be in native 8-bit encoding. Correspondingly for u2
with respect to s2
.
If the byte length l1
is non-zero, it says how far into s1
to check for fold
equality. In other words, s1
+l1
will be used as a goal to reach. The
scan will not be considered to be a match unless the goal is reached, and
scanning won't continue past that goal. Correspondingly for l2
with respect to
s2
.
If pe1
is non-NULL
and the pointer it points to is not NULL
, that pointer is
considered an end pointer to the position 1 byte past the maximum point
in s1
beyond which scanning will not continue under any circumstances.
(This routine assumes that UTF-8 encoded input strings are not malformed;
malformed input can cause it to read past pe1
).
This means that if both l1
and pe1
are specified, and pe1
is less than s1
+l1
, the match will never be successful because it can
never
get as far as its goal (and in fact is asserted against). Correspondingly for
pe2
with respect to s2
.
At least one of s1
and s2
must have a goal (at least one of l1
and
l2
must be non-zero), and if both do, both have to be
reached for a successful match. Also, if the fold of a character is multiple
characters, all of them must be matched (see tr21 reference below for
'folding').
Upon a successful match, if pe1
is non-NULL
,
it will be set to point to the beginning of the next character of s1
beyond what was matched. Correspondingly for pe2
and s2
.
For case-insensitiveness, the "casefolding" of Unicode is used instead of upper/lowercasing both the characters, see http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr21/ (Case Mappings).
- I32 foldEQ_utf8(const char *s1, char **pe1, UV l1,
- bool u1, const char *s2, char **pe2,
- UV l2, bool u2)
This is a misleadingly-named synonym for is_utf8_invariant_string.
On ASCII-ish platforms, the name isn't misleading: the ASCII-range characters
are exactly the UTF-8 invariants. But EBCDIC machines have more invariants
than just the ASCII characters, so is_utf8_invariant_string
is preferred.
- bool is_ascii_string(const U8* const s,
- const STRLEN len)
Returns TRUE if the first len
bytes of string s form a valid
UTF-8-encoded string that conforms to
Unicode Corrigendum #9;
otherwise it returns FALSE. If len
is 0, it will be calculated using
strlen(s)
(which means if you use this option, that s can't have embedded
NUL
characters and has to have a terminating NUL
byte). Note that all
characters being ASCII constitute 'a valid UTF-8 string'.
This function returns FALSE for strings containing any code points above the Unicode max of 0x10FFFF or surrogate code points, but accepts non-character code points per Corrigendum #9.
See also
is_utf8_invariant_string,
is_utf8_string,
is_utf8_string_flags,
is_utf8_string_loc,
is_utf8_string_loc_flags,
is_utf8_string_loclen,
is_utf8_string_loclen_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags,
is_strict_utf8_string,
is_strict_utf8_string_loc,
is_strict_utf8_string_loclen,
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc,
and
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_c9strict_utf8_string(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len)
Like is_c9strict_utf8_string but stores the location of the failure (in
the case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer.
See also is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep)
Like is_c9strict_utf8_string but stores the location of the failure (in
the case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer, and the number of UTF-8 encoded
characters in the el
pointer.
See also is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc.
- bool is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen(
- const U8 *s, const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep, STRLEN *el
- )
Evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting at s and
looking no further than e - 1
are well-formed UTF-8 that represents some
Unicode non-surrogate code point; otherwise it evaluates to 0. If non-zero,
the value gives how many bytes starting at s comprise the code point's
representation. Any bytes remaining before e
, but beyond the ones needed to
form the first code point in s, are not examined.
The largest acceptable code point is the Unicode maximum 0x10FFFF. This
differs from isSTRICT_UTF8_CHAR only in that it accepts non-character
code points. This corresponds to
Unicode Corrigendum #9.
which said that non-character code points are merely discouraged rather than
completely forbidden in open interchange. See
Noncharacter code points in perlunicode.
Use isUTF8_CHAR to check for Perl's extended UTF-8; and
isUTF8_CHAR_flags for a more customized definition.
Use is_c9strict_utf8_string, is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc, and
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen to check entire strings.
- STRLEN isC9_STRICT_UTF8_CHAR(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
This is a somewhat misleadingly-named synonym for is_utf8_invariant_string.
is_utf8_invariant_string
is preferred, as it indicates under what conditions
the string is invariant.
- bool is_invariant_string(const U8* const s,
- const STRLEN len)
Evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting at s and
looking no further than e - 1
are well-formed UTF-8 that represents some
Unicode code point completely acceptable for open interchange between all
applications; otherwise it evaluates to 0. If non-zero, the value gives how
many bytes starting at s comprise the code point's representation. Any
bytes remaining before e
, but beyond the ones needed to form the first code
point in s, are not examined.
The largest acceptable code point is the Unicode maximum 0x10FFFF, and must not be a surrogate nor a non-character code point. Thus this excludes any code point from Perl's extended UTF-8.
This is used to efficiently decide if the next few bytes in s is
legal Unicode-acceptable UTF-8 for a single character.
Use isC9_STRICT_UTF8_CHAR to use the Unicode Corrigendum #9 definition of allowable
code points; isUTF8_CHAR to check for Perl's extended UTF-8;
and isUTF8_CHAR_flags for a more customized definition.
Use is_strict_utf8_string, is_strict_utf8_string_loc, and
is_strict_utf8_string_loclen to check entire strings.
- STRLEN isSTRICT_UTF8_CHAR(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
Returns TRUE if the first len
bytes of string s form a valid
UTF-8-encoded string that is fully interchangeable by any application using
Unicode rules; otherwise it returns FALSE. If len
is 0, it will be
calculated using strlen(s)
(which means if you use this option, that s
can't have embedded NUL
characters and has to have a terminating NUL
byte). Note that all characters being ASCII constitute 'a valid UTF-8 string'.
This function returns FALSE for strings containing any code points above the Unicode max of 0x10FFFF, surrogate code points, or non-character code points.
See also
is_utf8_invariant_string,
is_utf8_string,
is_utf8_string_flags,
is_utf8_string_loc,
is_utf8_string_loc_flags,
is_utf8_string_loclen,
is_utf8_string_loclen_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags,
is_strict_utf8_string_loc,
is_strict_utf8_string_loclen,
is_c9strict_utf8_string,
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc,
and
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_strict_utf8_string(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len)
Like is_strict_utf8_string but stores the location of the failure (in the
case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer.
See also is_strict_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_strict_utf8_string_loc(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep)
Like is_strict_utf8_string but stores the location of the failure (in the
case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer, and the number of UTF-8
encoded characters in the el
pointer.
See also is_strict_utf8_string_loc.
- bool is_strict_utf8_string_loclen(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep,
- STRLEN *el)
Returns TRUE if the fixed-width buffer starting at s with length len
is entirely valid UTF-8, subject to the restrictions given by flags
;
otherwise it returns FALSE.
If flags
is 0, any well-formed UTF-8, as extended by Perl, is accepted
without restriction. If the final few bytes of the buffer do not form a
complete code point, this will return TRUE anyway, provided that
is_utf8_valid_partial_char_flags returns TRUE for them.
If flags
in non-zero, it can be any combination of the
UTF8_DISALLOW_foo flags accepted by utf8n_to_uvchr, and with the
same meanings.
This function differs from is_utf8_string_flags only in that the latter
returns FALSE if the final few bytes of the string don't form a complete code
point.
- bool is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags(
- const U8 * const s, const STRLEN len,
- const U32 flags
- )
Like is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags but stores the number of
complete, valid characters found in the el
pointer.
- bool is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags(
- const U8 * const s, const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep, STRLEN *el, const U32 flags
- )
Like is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags but stores the location of the
failure in the ep
pointer. If the function returns TRUE, *ep
will point
to the beginning of any partial character at the end of the buffer; if there is
no partial character *ep
will contain s+len
.
See also is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags.
- bool is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags(
- const U8 * const s, const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep, const U32 flags
- )
Returns TRUE if the first len
bytes of the string s are the same
regardless of the UTF-8 encoding of the string (or UTF-EBCDIC encoding on
EBCDIC machines); otherwise it returns FALSE. That is, it returns TRUE if they
are UTF-8 invariant. On ASCII-ish machines, all the ASCII characters and only
the ASCII characters fit this definition. On EBCDIC machines, the ASCII-range
characters are invariant, but so also are the C1 controls.
If len
is 0, it will be calculated using strlen(s)
, (which means if you
use this option, that s can't have embedded NUL
characters and has to
have a terminating NUL
byte).
See also
is_utf8_string,
is_utf8_string_flags,
is_utf8_string_loc,
is_utf8_string_loc_flags,
is_utf8_string_loclen,
is_utf8_string_loclen_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags,
is_strict_utf8_string,
is_strict_utf8_string_loc,
is_strict_utf8_string_loclen,
is_c9strict_utf8_string,
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc,
and
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_utf8_invariant_string(const U8* const s,
- STRLEN const len)
Returns TRUE if the first len
bytes of string s form a valid
Perl-extended-UTF-8 string; returns FALSE otherwise. If len
is 0, it will
be calculated using strlen(s)
(which means if you use this option, that s
can't have embedded NUL
characters and has to have a terminating NUL
byte). Note that all characters being ASCII constitute 'a valid UTF-8 string'.
This function considers Perl's extended UTF-8 to be valid. That means that
code points above Unicode, surrogates, and non-character code points are
considered valid by this function. Use is_strict_utf8_string,
is_c9strict_utf8_string, or is_utf8_string_flags to restrict what
code points are considered valid.
See also
is_utf8_invariant_string,
is_utf8_string_loc,
is_utf8_string_loclen,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags,
- bool is_utf8_string(const U8 *s, const STRLEN len)
Returns TRUE if the first len
bytes of string s form a valid
UTF-8 string, subject to the restrictions imposed by flags
;
returns FALSE otherwise. If len
is 0, it will be calculated
using strlen(s)
(which means if you use this option, that s can't have
embedded NUL
characters and has to have a terminating NUL
byte). Note
that all characters being ASCII constitute 'a valid UTF-8 string'.
If flags
is 0, this gives the same results as is_utf8_string; if
flags
is UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
, this gives the same results
as is_strict_utf8_string; and if flags
is
UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_C9_INTERCHANGE
, this gives the same results as
is_c9strict_utf8_string. Otherwise flags
may be any
combination of the UTF8_DISALLOW_foo flags understood by
utf8n_to_uvchr, with the same meanings.
See also
is_utf8_invariant_string,
is_utf8_string,
is_utf8_string_loc,
is_utf8_string_loc_flags,
is_utf8_string_loclen,
is_utf8_string_loclen_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loc_flags,
is_utf8_fixed_width_buf_loclen_flags,
is_strict_utf8_string,
is_strict_utf8_string_loc,
is_strict_utf8_string_loclen,
is_c9strict_utf8_string,
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loc,
and
is_c9strict_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_utf8_string_flags(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U32 flags)
Like is_utf8_string but stores the location of the failure (in the
case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer.
See also is_utf8_string_loclen.
- bool is_utf8_string_loc(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep)
Like is_utf8_string but stores the location of the failure (in the
case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer, and the number of UTF-8
encoded characters in the el
pointer.
See also is_utf8_string_loc.
- bool is_utf8_string_loclen(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep, STRLEN *el)
Like is_utf8_string_flags but stores the location of the failure (in the
case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer, and the number of UTF-8
encoded characters in the el
pointer.
See also is_utf8_string_loc_flags.
- bool is_utf8_string_loclen_flags(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep,
- STRLEN *el,
- const U32 flags)
Like is_utf8_string_flags but stores the location of the failure (in the
case of "utf8ness failure") or the location s+len
(in the case of
"utf8ness success") in the ep
pointer.
See also is_utf8_string_loclen_flags.
- bool is_utf8_string_loc_flags(const U8 *s,
- const STRLEN len,
- const U8 **ep,
- const U32 flags)
Returns 0 if the sequence of bytes starting at s and looking no further than
e - 1
is the UTF-8 encoding, as extended by Perl, for one or more code
points. Otherwise, it returns 1 if there exists at least one non-empty
sequence of bytes that when appended to sequence s, starting at position
e
causes the entire sequence to be the well-formed UTF-8 of some code point;
otherwise returns 0.
In other words this returns TRUE if s points to a partial UTF-8-encoded code
point.
This is useful when a fixed-length buffer is being tested for being well-formed UTF-8, but the final few bytes in it don't comprise a full character; that is, it is split somewhere in the middle of the final code point's UTF-8 representation. (Presumably when the buffer is refreshed with the next chunk of data, the new first bytes will complete the partial code point.) This function is used to verify that the final bytes in the current buffer are in fact the legal beginning of some code point, so that if they aren't, the failure can be signalled without having to wait for the next read.
- bool is_utf8_valid_partial_char(const U8 * const s,
- const U8 * const e)
Like is_utf8_valid_partial_char, it returns a boolean giving whether
or not the input is a valid UTF-8 encoded partial character, but it takes an
extra parameter, flags
, which can further restrict which code points are
considered valid.
If flags
is 0, this behaves identically to
is_utf8_valid_partial_char. Otherwise flags
can be any combination
of the UTF8_DISALLOW_foo flags accepted by utf8n_to_uvchr. If
there is any sequence of bytes that can complete the input partial character in
such a way that a non-prohibited character is formed, the function returns
TRUE; otherwise FALSE. Non character code points cannot be determined based on
partial character input. But many of the other possible excluded types can be
determined from just the first one or two bytes.
- bool is_utf8_valid_partial_char_flags(
- const U8 * const s, const U8 * const e,
- const U32 flags
- )
Evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting at s and
looking no further than e - 1
are well-formed UTF-8, as extended by Perl,
that represents some code point; otherwise it evaluates to 0. If non-zero, the
value gives how many bytes starting at s comprise the code point's
representation. Any bytes remaining before e
, but beyond the ones needed to
form the first code point in s, are not examined.
The code point can be any that will fit in a UV on this machine, using Perl's
extension to official UTF-8 to represent those higher than the Unicode maximum
of 0x10FFFF. That means that this macro is used to efficiently decide if the
next few bytes in s is legal UTF-8 for a single character.
Use isSTRICT_UTF8_CHAR to restrict the acceptable code points to those
defined by Unicode to be fully interchangeable across applications;
isC9_STRICT_UTF8_CHAR to use the Unicode Corrigendum #9 definition of allowable
code points; and isUTF8_CHAR_flags for a more customized definition.
Use is_utf8_string, is_utf8_string_loc, and
is_utf8_string_loclen to check entire strings.
Note that it is deprecated to use code points higher than what will fit in an IV. This macro does not raise any warnings for such code points, treating them as valid.
Note also that a UTF-8 INVARIANT character (i.e. ASCII on non-EBCDIC machines) is a valid UTF-8 character.
- STRLEN isUTF8_CHAR(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
Evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting at s and
looking no further than e - 1
are well-formed UTF-8, as extended by Perl,
that represents some code point, subject to the restrictions given by flags
;
otherwise it evaluates to 0. If non-zero, the value gives how many bytes
starting at s comprise the code point's representation. Any bytes remaining
before e
, but beyond the ones needed to form the first code point in s,
are not examined.
If flags
is 0, this gives the same results as isUTF8_CHAR;
if flags
is UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
, this gives the same results
as isSTRICT_UTF8_CHAR;
and if flags
is UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_C9_INTERCHANGE
, this gives
the same results as isC9_STRICT_UTF8_CHAR.
Otherwise flags
may be any combination of the UTF8_DISALLOW_foo flags
understood by utf8n_to_uvchr, with the same meanings.
The three alternative macros are for the most commonly needed validations; they are likely to run somewhat faster than this more general one, as they can be inlined into your code.
Use is_utf8_string_flags, is_utf8_string_loc_flags, and is_utf8_string_loclen_flags to check entire strings.
- STRLEN isUTF8_CHAR_flags(const U8 *s, const U8 *e,
- const U32 flags)
Build to the scalar dsv
a displayable version of the string spv
,
length len
, the displayable version being at most pvlim
bytes long
(if longer, the rest is truncated and "..."
will be appended).
The flags
argument can have UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT
set to display
isPRINT()
able characters as themselves, UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH
to display the \\[nrfta\\]
as the backslashed versions (like "\n"
)
(UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH
is preferred over UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT
for "\\"
).
UNI_DISPLAY_QQ
(and its alias UNI_DISPLAY_REGEX
) have both
UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH
and UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT
turned on.
The pointer to the PV of the dsv
is returned.
See also sv_uni_display.
- char* pv_uni_display(SV *dsv, const U8 *spv,
- STRLEN len, STRLEN pvlim,
- UV flags)
This is a macro that evaluates to a string constant of the UTF-8 bytes that
define the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER (U+FFFD) for the platform that perl
is compiled on. This allows code to use a mnemonic for this character that
works on both ASCII and EBCDIC platforms.
sizeof(REPLACEMENT_CHARACTER_UTF8) - 1
can be used to get its length in
bytes.
encoding
is assumed to be an Encode
object, the PV of ssv
is
assumed to be octets in that encoding and decoding the input starts
from the position which (PV + *offset)
pointed to. dsv
will be
concatenated with the decoded UTF-8 string from ssv
. Decoding will terminate
when the string tstr
appears in decoding output or the input ends on
the PV of ssv
. The value which offset
points will be modified
to the last input position on ssv
.
Returns TRUE if the terminator was found, else returns FALSE.
encoding
is assumed to be an Encode
object, on entry the PV
of sv
is assumed to be octets in that encoding, and sv
will be converted into Unicode (and UTF-8).
If sv
already is UTF-8 (or if it is not POK
), or if encoding
is not a reference, nothing is done to sv
. If encoding
is not
an Encode::XS
Encoding object, bad things will happen.
(See cpan/Encode/encoding.pm and Encode.)
The PV of sv
is returned.
- char* sv_recode_to_utf8(SV* sv, SV *encoding)
Build to the scalar dsv
a displayable version of the scalar sv
,
the displayable version being at most pvlim
bytes long
(if longer, the rest is truncated and "..." will be appended).
The flags
argument is as in pv_uni_display().
The pointer to the PV of the dsv
is returned.
- char* sv_uni_display(SV *dsv, SV *ssv, STRLEN pvlim,
- UV flags)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Instead use the appropriate one of toUPPER_utf8_safe, toTITLE_utf8_safe, toLOWER_utf8_safe, or toFOLD_utf8_safe.
This function will be removed in Perl v5.28.
p
contains the pointer to the UTF-8 string encoding
the character that is being converted. This routine assumes that the character
at p
is well-formed.
ustrp
is a pointer to the character buffer to put the
conversion result to. lenp
is a pointer to the length
of the result.
swashp
is a pointer to the swash to use.
Both the special and normal mappings are stored in lib/unicore/To/Foo.pl,
and loaded by SWASHNEW
, using lib/utf8_heavy.pl. special
(usually,
but not always, a multicharacter mapping), is tried first.
special
is a string, normally NULL
or ""
. NULL
means to not use
any special mappings; ""
means to use the special mappings. Values other
than these two are treated as the name of the hash containing the special
mappings, like "utf8::ToSpecLower"
.
normal
is a string like "ToLower"
which means the swash
%utf8::ToLower
.
Code points above the platform's IV_MAX
will raise a deprecation warning,
unless those are turned off.
- UV to_utf8_case(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
- STRLEN *lenp, SV **swashp,
- const char *normal,
- const char *special)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Instead use toFOLD_utf8_safe.
- UV to_utf8_fold(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
- STRLEN *lenp)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Instead use toLOWER_utf8_safe.
- UV to_utf8_lower(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
- STRLEN *lenp)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Instead use toTITLE_utf8_safe.
- UV to_utf8_title(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
- STRLEN *lenp)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Instead use toUPPER_utf8_safe.
- UV to_utf8_upper(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
- STRLEN *lenp)
THIS FUNCTION SHOULD BE USED IN ONLY VERY SPECIALIZED CIRCUMSTANCES. Most code should use utf8_to_uvchr_buf() rather than call this directly.
Bottom level UTF-8 decode routine.
Returns the native code point value of the first character in the string s,
which is assumed to be in UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC) encoding, and no longer than
curlen
bytes; *retlen
(if retlen
isn't NULL) will be set to
the length, in bytes, of that character.
The value of flags
determines the behavior when s does not point to a
well-formed UTF-8 character. If flags
is 0, encountering a malformation
causes zero to be returned and *retlen
is set so that (s + *retlen
)
is the next possible position in s that could begin a non-malformed
character. Also, if UTF-8 warnings haven't been lexically disabled, a warning
is raised. Some UTF-8 input sequences may contain multiple malformations.
This function tries to find every possible one in each call, so multiple
warnings can be raised for each sequence.
Various ALLOW flags can be set in flags
to allow (and not warn on)
individual types of malformations, such as the sequence being overlong (that
is, when there is a shorter sequence that can express the same code point;
overlong sequences are expressly forbidden in the UTF-8 standard due to
potential security issues). Another malformation example is the first byte of
a character not being a legal first byte. See utf8.h for the list of such
flags. Even if allowed, this function generally returns the Unicode
REPLACEMENT CHARACTER when it encounters a malformation. There are flags in
utf8.h to override this behavior for the overlong malformations, but don't
do that except for very specialized purposes.
The UTF8_CHECK_ONLY
flag overrides the behavior when a non-allowed (by other
flags) malformation is found. If this flag is set, the routine assumes that
the caller will raise a warning, and this function will silently just set
retlen
to -1
(cast to STRLEN
) and return zero.
Note that this API requires disambiguation between successful decoding a NUL
character, and an error return (unless the UTF8_CHECK_ONLY
flag is set), as
in both cases, 0 is returned, and, depending on the malformation, retlen
may
be set to 1. To disambiguate, upon a zero return, see if the first byte of
s is 0 as well. If so, the input was a NUL
; if not, the input had an
error. Or you can use utf8n_to_uvchr_error.
Certain code points are considered problematic. These are Unicode surrogates,
Unicode non-characters, and code points above the Unicode maximum of 0x10FFFF.
By default these are considered regular code points, but certain situations
warrant special handling for them, which can be specified using the flags
parameter. If flags
contains UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
, all
three classes are treated as malformations and handled as such. The flags
UTF8_DISALLOW_SURROGATE
, UTF8_DISALLOW_NONCHAR
, and
UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER
(meaning above the legal Unicode maximum) can be set to
disallow these categories individually. UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
restricts the allowed inputs to the strict UTF-8 traditionally defined by
Unicode. Use UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_C9_INTERCHANGE
to use the strictness
definition given by
Unicode Corrigendum #9.
The difference between traditional strictness and C9 strictness is that the
latter does not forbid non-character code points. (They are still discouraged,
however.) For more discussion see Noncharacter code points in perlunicode.
The flags UTF8_WARN_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
,
UTF8_WARN_ILLEGAL_C9_INTERCHANGE
, UTF8_WARN_SURROGATE
,
UTF8_WARN_NONCHAR
, and UTF8_WARN_SUPER
will cause warning messages to be
raised for their respective categories, but otherwise the code points are
considered valid (not malformations). To get a category to both be treated as
a malformation and raise a warning, specify both the WARN and DISALLOW flags.
(But note that warnings are not raised if lexically disabled nor if
UTF8_CHECK_ONLY
is also specified.)
It is now deprecated to have very high code points (above IV_MAX
on the
platforms) and this function will raise a deprecation warning for these (unless
such warnings are turned off). This value is typically 0x7FFF_FFFF (2**31 -1)
in a 32-bit word.
Code points above 0x7FFF_FFFF (2**31 - 1) were never specified in any standard,
so using them is more problematic than other above-Unicode code points. Perl
invented an extension to UTF-8 to represent the ones above 2**36-1, so it is
likely that non-Perl languages will not be able to read files that contain
these; nor would Perl understand files
written by something that uses a different extension. For these reasons, there
is a separate set of flags that can warn and/or disallow these extremely high
code points, even if other above-Unicode ones are accepted. These are the
UTF8_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT
and UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
flags. These
are entirely independent from the deprecation warning for code points above
IV_MAX
. On 32-bit machines, it will eventually be forbidden to have any
code point that needs more than 31 bits to represent. When that happens,
effectively the UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
flag will always be set on
32-bit machines. (Of course UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER
will treat all
above-Unicode code points, including these, as malformations; and
UTF8_WARN_SUPER
warns on these.)
On EBCDIC platforms starting in Perl v5.24, the Perl extension for representing
extremely high code points kicks in at 0x3FFF_FFFF (2**30 -1), which is lower
than on ASCII. Prior to that, code points 2**31 and higher were simply
unrepresentable, and a different, incompatible method was used to represent
code points between 2**30 and 2**31 - 1. The flags UTF8_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT
and UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
have the same function as on ASCII
platforms, warning and disallowing 2**31 and higher.
All other code points corresponding to Unicode characters, including private use and those yet to be assigned, are never considered malformed and never warn.
- UV utf8n_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
- STRLEN *retlen, const U32 flags)
THIS FUNCTION SHOULD BE USED IN ONLY VERY SPECIALIZED CIRCUMSTANCES. Most code should use utf8_to_uvchr_buf() rather than call this directly.
This function is for code that needs to know what the precise malformation(s) are when an error is found.
It is like utf8n_to_uvchr but it takes an extra parameter placed after
all the others, errors
. If this parameter is 0, this function behaves
identically to utf8n_to_uvchr. Otherwise, errors
should be a pointer
to a U32
variable, which this function sets to indicate any errors found.
Upon return, if *errors
is 0, there were no errors found. Otherwise,
*errors
is the bit-wise OR
of the bits described in the list below. Some
of these bits will be set if a malformation is found, even if the input
flags
parameter indicates that the given malformation is allowed; those
exceptions are noted:
UTF8_GOT_ABOVE_31_BIT
The code point represented by the input UTF-8 sequence occupies more than 31
bits.
This bit is set only if the input flags
parameter contains either the
UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
or the UTF8_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT
flags.
UTF8_GOT_CONTINUATION
The input sequence was malformed in that the first byte was a a UTF-8 continuation byte.
UTF8_GOT_EMPTY
The input curlen
parameter was 0.
UTF8_GOT_LONG
The input sequence was malformed in that there is some other sequence that evaluates to the same code point, but that sequence is shorter than this one.
UTF8_GOT_NONCHAR
The code point represented by the input UTF-8 sequence is for a Unicode
non-character code point.
This bit is set only if the input flags
parameter contains either the
UTF8_DISALLOW_NONCHAR
or the UTF8_WARN_NONCHAR
flags.
UTF8_GOT_NON_CONTINUATION
The input sequence was malformed in that a non-continuation type byte was found in a position where only a continuation type one should be.
UTF8_GOT_OVERFLOW
The input sequence was malformed in that it is for a code point that is not representable in the number of bits available in a UV on the current platform.
UTF8_GOT_SHORT
The input sequence was malformed in that curlen
is smaller than required for
a complete sequence. In other words, the input is for a partial character
sequence.
UTF8_GOT_SUPER
The input sequence was malformed in that it is for a non-Unicode code point;
that is, one above the legal Unicode maximum.
This bit is set only if the input flags
parameter contains either the
UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER
or the UTF8_WARN_SUPER
flags.
UTF8_GOT_SURROGATE
The input sequence was malformed in that it is for a -Unicode UTF-16 surrogate
code point.
This bit is set only if the input flags
parameter contains either the
UTF8_DISALLOW_SURROGATE
or the UTF8_WARN_SURROGATE
flags.
To do your own error handling, call this function with the UTF8_CHECK_ONLY
flag to suppress any warnings, and then examine the *errors
return.
- UV utf8n_to_uvchr_error(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
- STRLEN *retlen,
- const U32 flags,
- U32 * errors)
Instead use utf8_to_uvchr_buf, or rarely, utf8n_to_uvchr.
This function was useful for code that wanted to handle both EBCDIC and
ASCII platforms with Unicode properties, but starting in Perl v5.20, the
distinctions between the platforms have mostly been made invisible to most
code, so this function is quite unlikely to be what you want. If you do need
this precise functionality, use instead
NATIVE_TO_UNI(utf8_to_uvchr_buf(...))
or NATIVE_TO_UNI(utf8n_to_uvchr(...)).
- UV utf8n_to_uvuni(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
- STRLEN *retlen, U32 flags)
returns the number of bytes in the UTF-8 encoded character whose first (perhaps
only) byte is pointed to by s.
- STRLEN UTF8SKIP(char* s)
Returns the number of UTF-8 characters between the UTF-8 pointers a
and b
.
WARNING: use only if you *know* that the pointers point inside the same UTF-8 buffer.
- IV utf8_distance(const U8 *a, const U8 *b)
Return the UTF-8 pointer s displaced by off
characters, either
forward or backward.
WARNING: do not use the following unless you *know* off
is within
the UTF-8 data pointed to by s *and* that on entry s is aligned
on the first byte of character or just after the last byte of a character.
- U8* utf8_hop(const U8 *s, SSize_t off)
Return the UTF-8 pointer s displaced by up to off
characters,
backward.
off
must be non-positive.
s must be after or equal to start
.
When moving backward it will not move before start
.
Will not exceed this limit even if the string is not valid "UTF-8".
- U8* utf8_hop_back(const U8 *s, SSize_t off,
- const U8 *start)
Return the UTF-8 pointer s displaced by up to off
characters,
forward.
off
must be non-negative.
s must be before or equal to end
.
When moving forward it will not move beyond end
.
Will not exceed this limit even if the string is not valid "UTF-8".
- U8* utf8_hop_forward(const U8 *s, SSize_t off,
- const U8 *end)
Return the UTF-8 pointer s displaced by up to off
characters,
either forward or backward.
When moving backward it will not move before start
.
When moving forward it will not move beyond end
.
Will not exceed those limits even if the string is not valid "UTF-8".
- U8* utf8_hop_safe(const U8 *s, SSize_t off,
- const U8 *start, const U8 *end)
Evaluates to 1 if the byte c
represents the same character when encoded in
UTF-8 as when not; otherwise evaluates to 0. UTF-8 invariant characters can be
copied as-is when converting to/from UTF-8, saving time.
In spite of the name, this macro gives the correct result if the input string
from which c
comes is not encoded in UTF-8.
See UVCHR_IS_INVARIANT for checking if a UV is invariant.
- bool UTF8_IS_INVARIANT(char c)
Evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting at s and
looking no further than e - 1
are well-formed UTF-8 that represents one
of the Unicode non-character code points; otherwise it evaluates to 0. If
non-zero, the value gives how many bytes starting at s comprise the code
point's representation.
- bool UTF8_IS_NONCHAR(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
Recall that Perl recognizes an extension to UTF-8 that can encode code points larger than the ones defined by Unicode, which are 0..0x10FFFF.
This macro evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting
at s and looking no further than e - 1
are from this UTF-8 extension;
otherwise it evaluates to 0. If non-zero, the value gives how many bytes
starting at s comprise the code point's representation.
0 is returned if the bytes are not well-formed extended UTF-8, or if they represent a code point that cannot fit in a UV on the current platform. Hence this macro can give different results when run on a 64-bit word machine than on one with a 32-bit word size.
Note that it is deprecated to have code points that are larger than what can fit in an IV on the current machine.
- bool UTF8_IS_SUPER(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
Evaluates to non-zero if the first few bytes of the string starting at s and
looking no further than e - 1
are well-formed UTF-8 that represents one
of the Unicode surrogate code points; otherwise it evaluates to 0. If
non-zero, the value gives how many bytes starting at s comprise the code
point's representation.
- bool UTF8_IS_SURROGATE(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
Return the length of the UTF-8 char encoded string s in characters.
Stops at e
(inclusive). If e < s or if the scan would end
up past e
, croaks.
- STRLEN utf8_length(const U8* s, const U8 *e)
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.
Converts a string s of length len
from UTF-8 into native byte encoding.
Unlike bytes_to_utf8, this over-writes the original string, and
updates len
to contain the new length.
Returns zero on failure, setting len
to -1.
If you need a copy of the string, see bytes_from_utf8.
- U8* utf8_to_bytes(U8 *s, STRLEN *len)
Returns the native code point of the first character in the string s which
is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; send points to 1 beyond the end of s.
*retlen
will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.
If s does not point to a well-formed UTF-8 character and UTF8 warnings are
enabled, zero is returned and *retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't
NULL
) to -1. If those warnings are off, the computed value, if well-defined
(or the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER if not), is silently returned, and
*retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't NULL
) so that (s + *retlen
) is
the next possible position in s that could begin a non-malformed character.
See utf8n_to_uvchr for details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is
returned.
Code points above the platform's IV_MAX
will raise a deprecation warning,
unless those are turned off.
- UV utf8_to_uvchr_buf(const U8 *s, const U8 *send,
- STRLEN *retlen)
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it from existing code.
Only in very rare circumstances should code need to be dealing in Unicode
(as opposed to native) code points. In those few cases, use
NATIVE_TO_UNI(utf8_to_uvchr_buf(...)) instead.
Returns the Unicode (not-native) code point of the first character in the
string s which
is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; send points to 1 beyond the end of s.
retlen
will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.
If s does not point to a well-formed UTF-8 character and UTF8 warnings are
enabled, zero is returned and *retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't
NULL) to -1. If those warnings are off, the computed value if well-defined (or
the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, if not) is silently returned, and *retlen
is set (if retlen
isn't NULL) so that (s + *retlen
) is the
next possible position in s that could begin a non-malformed character.
See utf8n_to_uvchr for details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
Code points above the platform's IV_MAX
will raise a deprecation warning,
unless those are turned off.
- UV utf8_to_uvuni_buf(const U8 *s, const U8 *send,
- STRLEN *retlen)
Evaluates to 1 if the representation of code point cp
is the same whether or
not it is encoded in UTF-8; otherwise evaluates to 0. UTF-8 invariant
characters can be copied as-is when converting to/from UTF-8, saving time.
cp
is Unicode if above 255; otherwise is platform-native.
- bool UVCHR_IS_INVARIANT(UV cp)
returns the number of bytes required to represent the code point cp
when
encoded as UTF-8. cp
is a native (ASCII or EBCDIC) code point if less than
255; a Unicode code point otherwise.
- STRLEN UVCHR_SKIP(UV cp)
Adds the UTF-8 representation of the native code point uv
to the end
of the string d
; d
should have at least UVCHR_SKIP(uv)+1
(up to
UTF8_MAXBYTES+1
) free bytes available. The return value is the pointer to
the byte after the end of the new character. In other words,
- d = uvchr_to_utf8(d, uv);
is the recommended wide native character-aware way of saying
- *(d++) = uv;
This function accepts any UV as input, but very high code points (above
IV_MAX
on the platform) will raise a deprecation warning. This is
typically 0x7FFF_FFFF in a 32-bit word.
It is possible to forbid or warn on non-Unicode code points, or those that may be problematic by using uvchr_to_utf8_flags.
- U8* uvchr_to_utf8(U8 *d, UV uv)
Adds the UTF-8 representation of the native code point uv
to the end
of the string d
; d
should have at least UVCHR_SKIP(uv)+1
(up to
UTF8_MAXBYTES+1
) free bytes available. The return value is the pointer to
the byte after the end of the new character. In other words,
- d = uvchr_to_utf8_flags(d, uv, flags);
or, in most cases,
- d = uvchr_to_utf8_flags(d, uv, 0);
This is the Unicode-aware way of saying
- *(d++) = uv;
If flags
is 0, this function accepts any UV as input, but very high code
points (above IV_MAX
for the platform) will raise a deprecation warning.
This is typically 0x7FFF_FFFF in a 32-bit word.
Specifying flags
can further restrict what is allowed and not warned on, as
follows:
If uv
is a Unicode surrogate code point and UNICODE_WARN_SURROGATE
is set,
the function will raise a warning, provided UTF8 warnings are enabled. If
instead UNICODE_DISALLOW_SURROGATE
is set, the function will fail and return
NULL. If both flags are set, the function will both warn and return NULL.
Similarly, the UNICODE_WARN_NONCHAR
and UNICODE_DISALLOW_NONCHAR
flags
affect how the function handles a Unicode non-character.
And likewise, the UNICODE_WARN_SUPER
and UNICODE_DISALLOW_SUPER
flags
affect the handling of code points that are above the Unicode maximum of
0x10FFFF. Languages other than Perl may not be able to accept files that
contain these.
The flag UNICODE_WARN_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
selects all three of
the above WARN flags; and UNICODE_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
selects all
three DISALLOW flags. UNICODE_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE
restricts the
allowed inputs to the strict UTF-8 traditionally defined by Unicode.
Similarly, UNICODE_WARN_ILLEGAL_C9_INTERCHANGE
and
UNICODE_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_C9_INTERCHANGE
are shortcuts to select the
above-Unicode and surrogate flags, but not the non-character ones, as
defined in
Unicode Corrigendum #9.
See Noncharacter code points in perlunicode.
Code points above 0x7FFF_FFFF (2**31 - 1) were never specified in any standard,
so using them is more problematic than other above-Unicode code points. Perl
invented an extension to UTF-8 to represent the ones above 2**36-1, so it is
likely that non-Perl languages will not be able to read files that contain
these that written by the perl interpreter; nor would Perl understand files
written by something that uses a different extension. For these reasons, there
is a separate set of flags that can warn and/or disallow these extremely high
code points, even if other above-Unicode ones are accepted. These are the
UNICODE_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT
and UNICODE_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
flags. These
are entirely independent from the deprecation warning for code points above
IV_MAX
. On 32-bit machines, it will eventually be forbidden to have any
code point that needs more than 31 bits to represent. When that happens,
effectively the UNICODE_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
flag will always be set on
32-bit machines. (Of course UNICODE_DISALLOW_SUPER
will treat all
above-Unicode code points, including these, as malformations; and
UNICODE_WARN_SUPER
warns on these.)
On EBCDIC platforms starting in Perl v5.24, the Perl extension for representing
extremely high code points kicks in at 0x3FFF_FFFF (2**30 -1), which is lower
than on ASCII. Prior to that, code points 2**31 and higher were simply
unrepresentable, and a different, incompatible method was used to represent
code points between 2**30 and 2**31 - 1. The flags UNICODE_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT
and UNICODE_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT
have the same function as on ASCII
platforms, warning and disallowing 2**31 and higher.
- U8* uvchr_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv, UV flags)
THIS FUNCTION SHOULD BE USED IN ONLY VERY SPECIALIZED CIRCUMSTANCES. Instead, Almost all code should use uvchr_to_utf8 or uvchr_to_utf8_flags.
This function is like them, but the input is a strict Unicode (as opposed to native) code point. Only in very rare circumstances should code not be using the native code point.
For details, see the description for uvchr_to_utf8_flags.
- U8* uvoffuni_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv,
- const UV flags)
Instead you almost certainly want to use uvchr_to_utf8 or uvchr_to_utf8_flags.
This function is a deprecated synonym for uvoffuni_to_utf8_flags, which itself, while not deprecated, should be used only in isolated circumstances. These functions were useful for code that wanted to handle both EBCDIC and ASCII platforms with Unicode properties, but starting in Perl v5.20, the distinctions between the platforms have mostly been made invisible to most code, so this function is quite unlikely to be what you want.
- U8* uvuni_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv, UV flags)
Like utf8_to_uvchr_buf, but should only be called when it is known that
the next character in the input UTF-8 string s is well-formed (e.g.,
it passes isUTF8_CHAR. Surrogates, non-character code points, and
non-Unicode code points are allowed.
- UV valid_utf8_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)
xsubpp
and xsubpp
internal functionsUsed by xsubpp
to hook up XSUBs as Perl subs. Adds Perl prototypes to
the subs.
Macro to verify that the perl api version an XS module has been compiled against matches the api version of the perl interpreter it's being loaded into.
- XS_APIVERSION_BOOTCHECK;
The version identifier for an XS module. This is usually
handled automatically by ExtUtils::MakeMaker
. See
XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK.
Macro to verify that a PM module's $VERSION
variable matches the XS
module's XS_VERSION
variable. This is usually handled automatically by
xsubpp
. See The VERSIONCHECK: Keyword in perlxs.
- XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK;
Returns a boolean as to whether or not warnings are enabled for the warning
category w
. If the category is by default enabled even if not within the
scope of use warnings
, instead use the ckWARN_d macro.
- bool ckWARN(U32 w)
Like ckWARN, but takes two warnings categories as input, and returns
TRUE if either is enabled. If either category is by default enabled even if
not within the scope of use warnings
, instead use the ckWARN2_d
macro. The categories must be completely independent, one may not be
subclassed from the other.
- bool ckWARN2(U32 w1, U32 w2)
Like ckWARN2, but takes three warnings categories as input, and returns
TRUE if any is enabled. If any of the categories is by default enabled even
if not within the scope of use warnings
, instead use the ckWARN3_d
macro. The categories must be completely independent, one may not be
subclassed from any other.
- bool ckWARN3(U32 w1, U32 w2, U32 w3)
Like ckWARN3, but takes four warnings categories as input, and returns
TRUE if any is enabled. If any of the categories is by default enabled even
if not within the scope of use warnings
, instead use the ckWARN4_d
macro. The categories must be completely independent, one may not be
subclassed from any other.
- bool ckWARN4(U32 w1, U32 w2, U32 w3, U32 w4)
Like ckWARN, but for use if and only if the warning category is by
default enabled even if not within the scope of use warnings
.
- bool ckWARN_d(U32 w)
Like ckWARN2, but for use if and only if either warning category is by
default enabled even if not within the scope of use warnings
.
- bool ckWARN2_d(U32 w1, U32 w2)
Like ckWARN3, but for use if and only if any of the warning categories
is by default enabled even if not within the scope of use warnings
.
- bool ckWARN3_d(U32 w1, U32 w2, U32 w3)
Like ckWARN4, but for use if and only if any of the warning categories
is by default enabled even if not within the scope of use warnings
.
- bool ckWARN4_d(U32 w1, U32 w2, U32 w3, U32 w4)
This is an XS interface to Perl's die function.
Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list. These are used to generate a string message. If the message does not end with a newline, then it will be extended with some indication of the current location in the code, as described for mess_sv.
The error message will be used as an exception, by default
returning control to the nearest enclosing eval, but subject to
modification by a $SIG{__DIE__}
handler. In any case, the croak
function never returns normally.
For historical reasons, if pat
is null then the contents of ERRSV
($@
) will be used as an error message or object instead of building an
error message from arguments. If you want to throw a non-string object,
or build an error message in an SV yourself, it is preferable to use
the croak_sv function, which does not involve clobbering ERRSV
.
- void croak(const char *pat, ...)
Exactly equivalent to Perl_croak(aTHX_ "%s", PL_no_modify)
, but generates
terser object code than using Perl_croak
. Less code used on exception code
paths reduces CPU cache pressure.
- void croak_no_modify()
This is an XS interface to Perl's die function.
baseex
is the error message or object. If it is a reference, it
will be used as-is. Otherwise it is used as a string, and if it does
not end with a newline then it will be extended with some indication of
the current location in the code, as described for mess_sv.
The error message or object will be used as an exception, by default
returning control to the nearest enclosing eval, but subject to
modification by a $SIG{__DIE__}
handler. In any case, the croak_sv
function never returns normally.
To die with a simple string message, the croak function may be more convenient.
- void croak_sv(SV *baseex)
Behaves the same as croak, except for the return type.
It should be used only where the OP *
return type is required.
The function never actually returns.
- OP * die(const char *pat, ...)
Behaves the same as croak_sv, except for the return type.
It should be used only where the OP *
return type is required.
The function never actually returns.
- OP * die_sv(SV *baseex)
This is an XS interface to Perl's die function.
pat
and args
are a sprintf-style format pattern and encapsulated
argument list. These are used to generate a string message. If the
message does not end with a newline, then it will be extended with
some indication of the current location in the code, as described for
mess_sv.
The error message will be used as an exception, by default
returning control to the nearest enclosing eval, but subject to
modification by a $SIG{__DIE__}
handler. In any case, the croak
function never returns normally.
For historical reasons, if pat
is null then the contents of ERRSV
($@
) will be used as an error message or object instead of building an
error message from arguments. If you want to throw a non-string object,
or build an error message in an SV yourself, it is preferable to use
the croak_sv function, which does not involve clobbering ERRSV
.
- void vcroak(const char *pat, va_list *args)
This is an XS interface to Perl's warn function.
pat
and args
are a sprintf-style format pattern and encapsulated
argument list. These are used to generate a string message. If the
message does not end with a newline, then it will be extended with
some indication of the current location in the code, as described for
mess_sv.
The error message or object will by default be written to standard error,
but this is subject to modification by a $SIG{__WARN__}
handler.
Unlike with vcroak, pat
is not permitted to be null.
- void vwarn(const char *pat, va_list *args)
This is an XS interface to Perl's warn function.
Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list. These are used to generate a string message. If the message does not end with a newline, then it will be extended with some indication of the current location in the code, as described for mess_sv.
The error message or object will by default be written to standard error,
but this is subject to modification by a $SIG{__WARN__}
handler.
Unlike with croak, pat
is not permitted to be null.
- void warn(const char *pat, ...)
This is an XS interface to Perl's warn function.
baseex
is the error message or object. If it is a reference, it
will be used as-is. Otherwise it is used as a string, and if it does
not end with a newline then it will be extended with some indication of
the current location in the code, as described for mess_sv.
The error message or object will by default be written to standard error,
but this is subject to modification by a $SIG{__WARN__}
handler.
To warn with a simple string message, the warn function may be more convenient.
- void warn_sv(SV *baseex)
The following functions have been flagged as part of the public API, but are currently undocumented. Use them at your own risk, as the interfaces are subject to change. Functions that are not listed in this document are not intended for public use, and should NOT be used under any circumstances.
If you feel you need to use one of these functions, first send email to [email protected]. It may be that there is a good reason for the function not being documented, and it should be removed from this list; or it may just be that no one has gotten around to documenting it. In the latter case, you will be asked to submit a patch to document the function. Once your patch is accepted, it will indicate that the interface is stable (unless it is explicitly marked otherwise) and usable by you.
Until May 1997, this document was maintained by Jeff Okamoto <[email protected]>. It is now maintained as part of Perl itself.
With lots of help and suggestions from Dean Roehrich, Malcolm Beattie, Andreas Koenig, Paul Hudson, Ilya Zakharevich, Paul Marquess, Neil Bowers, Matthew Green, Tim Bunce, Spider Boardman, Ulrich Pfeifer, Stephen McCamant, and Gurusamy Sarathy.
API Listing originally by Dean Roehrich <[email protected]>.
Updated to be autogenerated from comments in the source by Benjamin Stuhl.
perlguts, perlxs, perlxstut, perlintern